Rear Sia hg Rear eee dad as SSITR ΣΕ Sea 


pees sears 7? are 


Rn er 
Sane ee 


eiarentarss 


eee, 


᾿ 


- 


Ae 
Mi 


i 


ἥ 


ΗΝ 


if 


Gh 
al 


x 
> 


nyt 


re bey 


Tagen Se 
eet ee ; he eM Fe 
“ - 4 


7 


oe GOO RES 


ON 


GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 


CUith Erercises 


\ 
By A. SIDGWICK, M.A. 


FELLOW AND TUTOR OF CORPUS CHRISTI COLLEGE, OXFORD; LATE ASSISTANT MASTER 
AT RUGBY SCHOOL, AND FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE 


SECOND EDITION 


RIVINGTONS 
WATERLOO PLACE, LONDON 
| MDCCCLXXXIX 


BOSTON COLLEGE LIBRARY 
CHESTNUT HILL, MASS, 


PA+O | 
38th. 


ere CE 


᾿ My object in writing these Lectures has been to give 
the student of Greek Prose Composition (when he has 


passed the earlier stages) a kind of assistance which he 


often needs, and which Rules, however carefully framed, 
will not give him. He may get a good deal from hints, | 
and from reading, and from practice ; but there will still 
be many questions arising, when he comes to do a new 
piece, which neither hints, reading, nor practice will enable 
_ him at once to answer. | 
It seemed to me possible, that if he were, by the aid of © 
such Lectures as the following, to witness the actual process 
of composition,—to see a typical collection of passages 
handled in detail, so to speak, before his eyes,—it might 
to some extent meet this requirement. Having mastered 
the Accidence, and the ordinary Syntax, and reached a 
_ fair proficiency in the knowledge of idiomatic usage, he 
would be helped toward the further stages by seeing the 
various difficulties pointed out and solved; by watching 
the process of selection and rejection of words and expres- 
‘sions and turns of idiom; by witnessing the application— 
always the real difficulty—of the rules and principles 


iv PREFACE, 


which he has learnt; and instead of merely doing the 


piece himself, and then reading the version of it by 
another hand, he would have the reasons put out before 
him in black and white, at every point, why each sentence 
and clause was turned in such a way, and not in such 
another. | 

In such a treatment there is sure to be a certain amount 
of repetition, which will perhaps be for some students 
superfluous ; but, in the first place, it is often inevitable, 


as cases are constantly occurring where old principles — 


have to be applied in a slightly new way, which without 
the re-statement the student might miss; and in the next 
place, even where the point is the same as before, repeti- 
tion may be necessary for the thorough mastery of it. I 


venture to hope that for the average, whose interests I | 
have had in view all along, the repetitions in these 


Lectures will not be found excessive. 

I have also naturally kept in mind the obvious distine- 
tions between the three principal Attic prose styles, — 
Narrative, Rhetorical, and Philosophical. The passages in 
the first ten Lectures are accordingly historical ; the next’ 
six are from speeches; and the remaining four are such 
as might be set to be done into the style of Plato. - 

The notes on Structure and Idiom which are prefixed to 


the Lectures are intended mainly as a kind of catalogue 


raisonné of the points chiefly treated in the course of the 
Lectures themselves. 
I hope they will serve the double purpose of an index 


PREFACE. v 


to the Lectures, enabling the student to find at once what 
points are discussed in the Lectures, and where the discus- 
sion is to be found, and also as a collection of similar 
instances, so that he may gain additional mastery over 
any point he is considering by the helpful method of 
comparison. 

Of the fifty Exercises which, in deference to the opinion 
of experienced friends, I have added to the end of the 
Lectures, 1 to 28 are Narrative, 29 to 39 are Oratorical, 
and the remainder are intended to be turned into Platonic — 
Greek. I ought to add that one of the Lectures (No. 3) 
deals with a passage from Messrs. Sargent and Dallin’s 
excellent work, Materials and Models, and that I have the 
kind permission of my friend Mr. J. Y. Sargent to use it 
here. 

I have only to add that I shall be very grateful to any 
one who uses the book if he will send me any correction 
or suggestion. 


OxFORD, 1886. 


SON NES 


Noves oN SrrucTuRE AND IpIomM— 
A. Main points of structure. B, Minor points of idiom: 


Noun usages—Adjective and Relative usages—Verb 


usages —Adverbs, etc., ; . . Page 1-21 
LECTURES— 

I, Queen of Scots, . : : : ἔ 25 

II. Death of Antony, . ; : ἢ : 91 
III. Zapena, : ; : 37 
IV. Phyllidas, . ; ; 44 
V. Calais, : : ; . ; 50 
VI, Paulinus, . : : ; 56 
VII. Cleveland, . ; « : 62 
VIII. Charles, : Ξ ᾿ : at 68 
IX. Daneios, f ; : : ᾿ : 78 
X. Exeter, ; Σ : : : ; -78 
XI. Plancius—(Cicero), . . 83 
XII. Cobden—(Bright), . : : ; 89 
XIII. Present Discontents—(Burke), 94 
XIV. ‘Sentimental’ Politics—(Burke), . : nae 99 


XV. O’Connell— (Macaulay), : Ἵ Ve 


Muon So CONTENTS, 


LeorurEs—continued. 
XVI. The Duke of Grafton—(Junius), . 


XVII. The Dog—(Helps), ὁ. a 


XVIII. The Captain and the Priest, ὁ. 
XIX. Friends’ Verses—-(Boswell), : 
XX. Revelations—(Swift), . ΦΉΣ 


EXERCISES— 


1—50, ΣΦ , . . δι Ἂ 


ΒΕῚ 
ye 
- 
ι 
. 
5 ν᾽ 
. 
~ 
΄ . 
7 
—' 


NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND IDIOM. 


THE points illustrated in these Lectures may be broadly 
divided into two classes, which it will be better to treat 
separately :— 

A. Main points of structure, which turn chiefly on the 
vividness, simplicity, and plain directness of the Greek 
(particularly in narrative style, though the same prin- 
ciples prevail widely in all Greek prose), compared with 
the various artificiality of the English idiom ; 


B. Minor points of idiom, comprising such differences 
as will emerge when any two languages are compared, 
especially when the comparison is between an ancient and 
a modern language; and also various detailed usages, 
which make a great deal of difference to the idiomatic 
taste of the Greek rendering, but which it is difficult to 

refer to any larger principles. 


A. Mazin Ponts of Structure. 


81. The first and most fundamental point is the ten- 
dency in English to the abstract where in Greek the clause 
(in a variety of ways, see my Greek Prose Composition, 
§§ 106, 113) is more concrete. 

i. 2. published the occasion διήγγειλε διὰ τί οὐκ ἐπίθετο 

of his disobedience 
i. 5. civilwarwasapproach- ἐστασίαζον, or ἐς πόλεμον ὅσον 
ing ᾿ οὔπω κατέστησαν 
A 


= iii. 2. delay might cause loss 

ee of the prize 

ἐξ iii, 4. with destruction await- 

aa ing 

od iv. 3. violence would be an 

δ affront 

iv. 4. services put in requisi- 
tion 

: v. 2. yielded to his urgency 

3 ix. 3. never disappointed of 
their aims 

‘ge x. 4. a project had been on 

- foot — 

; xii. 5. in my conscience 


xi. 1. present convulsions 


§ 2. Further examples, where the personalising tende 


of Greek is shown. 


i. 3. both stories are pro- 


bably true 


Heo: ii. 2. his moderation was 
τῆ displayed .. . 


iv. 3. the time for open war 


was not yet 


the provisions were no 
longer binding 

the effect of all this 
providence was not 

| such as was to be 

see expected 

eee a. ix. 7. 

sion to a harder 

yoke 


NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND IDIOM, 


“μέλλοντα ἀπολέσθαι 


it must end in submis- 


fe ᾿ς “ ri 


P ν᾿ ἷ : < ἊΝ 
ἢν μέλλωσι, φοβερὸν. 
ete. τ᾽ 


χρῆσθαι 


προθυμουμένῳ ἐπίθετο 


8 pee LL’ a. * 

ἀεὶ ὧν εφίεντο τυχεῖν 
4 

παρεσκεύαζον 


7.5 4 
KaT ELAUTOV 


στασιάζουσιν 


΄ 


” Φ ΡΝ οὐ ἢ 
OUTW ETOL{LOL OVTES ες ; 


; 11 ea 
πόλεμον καταστῆναι 


“ πω. ‘ob ate 
ὥστε μηκέτι ὑπόσπονδοι € 
οὐ κατ᾽ ἐλπίδα ἀπέβη,. 
3 Υ̓ z a 
evAaBovpévots 


NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND IDIOM. 3 


xi. 5. what is required in ἃ ἄρχοντα αἱρουμένους δεῖ ζητεῖν 
candidate . 
xiii. 1. their account resolves τοῦτο τῷ ὄντι λέγουσιν... 
itself into... 


xiv. 3. magnanimity is the πλεῖστ᾽ ἂν σωφρονοίη τις peya- 


truest wisdom λόψυχος ὦν 
[See the fourteenth lecture all through for this point. | 


xv. 1. there is an apparent φαίνονται ἡσυχίαν ἔχειν 
tranquillity 


3. English is also often obscurer than Greek because 
of the allusivencss of style: expressions are used which are 
intelligible enough with the context, but in themselves 


- vague or ambiguous. The Greek idiom requires a simpler 


and more direct style. 


i. 4. Murray’s offer was evi- δῆλος ἣν ἐπιβουλεύων ἐπεὶ 
dence against himself τοιαῦτα ὑπέσχετο 
[what offer? evidence of what? The Greek will go — 
nearer than the English to answering these questions. | 
i, 6. toextricateherselffrom τοῦ κινδύνου περιγενησομένη 
the consequences [1.6. , 
danger | 
v. 4. sentin her demand [for ἠξίου παραλαβεῖν 
the town to be re- 


stored | 
vii. 5. orderscametohim[evi- ἀγγέλων ἡκόντων ὡς βοηθεῖν 
dently to help| δεῖ 


xv. 2. feeling deep interest in οἰκτείροντες ofa πάσχει or 


his fate [ = pity] τοιαῦτα πάσχοντα 


xy. 4. attached to the union περὶ πολλοῦ ποιούμενος ἐκείνους 
μήποτε αὐτονόμους γενέσθαι 


i. 6. what will be their feel- πῶς οἴεσθε ἀγανακτεῖν 
ings ? [= anger] 


4 NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND IDIOM. 


§ 4. A special form of this is the ambiguity caused by — 


euphemisms in English. Greek also has its euphemisms, 
especially in Platonic Greek: but naturally there is no 
exact correspondence between the idioms, and the euphem- 
isms of each language should be noted separately. 


x. 1. all was not right δόλου τινὸς παρασκευαζομένου 
or ἐπιβουλεύειν, μηχανᾶσθαΐ 
Tt, ete. ; 


ix. 1. results of the engage- τῇ ἥσσῃ 
ment 


xvi. 8. administration no οὐκέτι ἀσφαλὲς εἶναι, ete. 
longer tenable 


§ 5. Very often the English, without being really vague, 
substitutes for variety some circuitous expression for the 


actual thing meant: or implies what the Greek will 


explicitly state. 
iv. 2. [The whole section should be referred to. ] 


iv. 1. her misadventure at τὰ περὶ τὸν γάμον ov κατώρθωσε, 


the time of the 
Scotch marriage 


vi. 8. to go on winning τὰ ἔτι πορρωτέρω καταδραμεῖν 

Vili. 2. he expected obedience τοὺς δὲ οὐχ ὅτι πιθέσθαι ὥσπερ 
and received a mes- ἠξίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀντειπεῖν τι 
sage τολμῆσαι 

x. 5. the truth was further τοιόνδε τι ἐγένετο ὥστε καὶ 

established by a co- μᾶλλον πιστεύειν 
incidence 

xi. 6. [in buying slaves] we .. . οὐδὲ τὸν δικαιότατον ἂν 
object to one how- πριαίμεθα 


ever honest 


a 
ἧς. 

b 

' % 


“x 


wae. 


‘ 


τ δ᾽ τον ΟΝ 


Tae 
ae 


7 NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND IDIOM. 5 


§ 6. Another difference of idiom is due to the greater 
tendency in English narrative to picturesqueness of expres- 


sion. 
111. 5. were hoarse with indig- 
nation 
ἐδ. rallied to the banner 
iv. 6. loaded with irons 
. awakened by the general 


xv. 3. when the door of ajail 
has closed on him 


ib. that he lose his hold on 
their affections 


1, 1. as he was mounting his 
horse he was told 


xvi. 2. no reason but the 
frowns of his master 


The Greek will again be direct and simple. 


3 , \ ἈΝ 2 Lay 
eo xeTAiafov καὶ δεινὰ ἐποιοῦντο 


προσεχώρησαν 
ἔδησαν 
use παραμυθεῖσθαι or θαρσύνω 


ἐπειδὰν ἅπαξ εἱρχθῃ 
ἧσσόν τι τιμήσειν 


τῷ δὲ πα έ ov ἵ 

f ρασκευαζομένῳ τὸν ἵπ- 
πον ἤγγειλέ τις 

πλὴν εἰ δυσχεραίνων ὁ βασι- 
λεὺς ἀπήλασεν 


8 7. A special case of this is the English habit of con- 
veying a fact by a picturesque epithet: in Greek the point 
must be told otherwise, never as part of the attribute. 


ii. 1. the fatal dagger 


iv. 4. the traitor Hyrlas 


vi. 7. the places consecrate to 
their cruel rites de- 
stroyed 


xv. 2. the fate of their perse- 
cuted tribune 


xy. 3. an agitator whom they 
adored 


Hither omit it (the fact being 
plain from the context), or 
ᾧ διεφθάρη 

τῷ πρότερον μηνύσαντι (apposi- 
tion) 


καθελόντες ἔπαυσαν 


Ν ε Ἂς 

τὰ ἱερὰ 

μηκέτι τοιούτοις χρῆσθαι 
σφαγίοις 


[see the wholesentence, p. 105. | 


ὅντινα δημηγοροῦντα ἐτίμων 


form of metaphors. 


ΠΥ a. «| = ee a ee oe ΤΑ on) © Pade ne es. te 1 See CU CU ee OO π΄. Ὁ Ζου 
Ὗ ἊΣ τ δ ES es, os ν νον, τ 5. ὁ 

‘ 2 ee wes - res a ALOR Dey ΚΟ 

rs ; F . εἴ aden ap οὐ A 


In Greek, use either the name, or arranien SO that 


noun will do, or omit. 


li, 1. the conqueror 


τς w. his enemy 


ii. 3. the strange visitor 
ii. 4. the imprisoned queen 


6 NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND ἴων Ἐ 


Ὶ i "a S s.2 


[say simply ‘Octavius? 

for all] a 
may be omitted 
τὸν ἄνδρα 


ἡ βασίλεια 


[This usage is not a mark generally of the best style: ὃ 1 


all the instances in these exercises are confined to της 
: piece of Merivale}. 


- 


§ 9. The English picturesqueness sometimes takes 
The principle that should guide us 
translating is fully expounded in my Greck Prose 
position, §§ 178-181; but we may say that nine é 


out of ten simple fact should be substituted in πον ς for 


the metaphor. 


1. 5. to foster strife 
ib. . . . impossible to acquit 


her 

111, 4. seeing himself en- 
trapped 

ib τ6 δὶγάβ ~would be 
flown 

v. 6. the dispute was hang- 
ing 

x. 5. took time by the fore- 
lock 

xiv. 1. the profane herd 


προθυμεῖσθαι 
δῆλος ἢν 


3 ~ ΥΝ JON 
ἀμηχανῶν, or εἰδὼς 
ἀπορίᾳ κατέχεται 


οὐδένα καταλήψεσθαι 
οὐδέν πω ξυνέβη 
bOdous 

[see the whole section, 


ΓΕ ; 


. 
"Xe 


1. ὦ 


NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND IDIOM. ᾽ 


o “xiv. 1. to turn a wheel in the οὐδὲ τὸ φαυλότατον μέρος 
ἱ machine [of empire] μεταχειρίσασθαι 


810. A subtle form of this is the personifications of 
inanimate things which are found in English. Without 
- going so far as to say these are excluded in Greek, at any 

rate we may safely say they are much rarer: and it is 
best to avoid them. 


iii. 4. the ships, which alone ai νῆες... ἢ μόνον ἔτι ἐλπὶς 
‘ offered means of σωθῆναι 
escape [not παρεῖχον] 


Many other instances in sections 1-5. 


. § 11. Occasionally the metaphor, especially (and mainly) 
in rhetoric, is important: and then it should be usually 
expanded into a simile, 


xii. 2, the light and sunshine ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας ὥσπερ φῶς μοι καὶ 
of my house had ἥλιος ἀπέσβη 
been extinguished 


xiii. 1. we set ourselves to ὥσπερφαῦλοι κύνες τοὺς τρέφον- 
bite the hand that τας δάκνομεν 


| feeds us 

xill. 3. our dominions abroad ἐκ τῆς ἔξωθεν ἀρχῆς ὥσπερ ἐκ 
are the root which φαύλης pins ἐς τοσοῦτον 
feeds this rank luxu- τέθηλεν ἡ στάσις 


riance of sedition 


τς 812. English is, however, not only picturesque and 
εἰ metaphorical ; it is also, as compared with Greek, artificial 
in many ways. 

First, in order of narrative: before we turn a piece into 


ὃ NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND IDIOM. 


Greek, it is always useful to think out the story as it 
happened, and then, in translating, keep as neue as 


possible to the actual order. 


u. 5. he detained her in con- 
versation with a con- 
federate at the door, 
while with one or 
two followers he 
climbed .. . 


111. 1. these arguments, which 
had much logic in 
them, were strongly 
urged by Zapena, 
whose counsels were 
usually received with 
deference. But on 
this occasion . 


v. 4. the eight years, after 
which, by the terms 
of the peace Calais 
was to be restored, 
had just expired, 
She had sent in her 


demand... 

vi. 1. emulating others of 
whose deeds he 
heard from abroad, 
he marches. . . 

x. 5. the truth was. still 


further established 
by acoincidence. At 
the same time as 
the messengers were 
reporting, a man 
was arrested . . 


‘ A , Ν lA 
παρὰ τῇ θύρᾳ τινὰ προστάξας, 
μ4 fs bee, Cor 4 
ἵνα διαλεγόμενος αὐτὴν ἐπί- 
σχοι, αὐτὸς ὀλίγων ἑπομένων 


ἀνέβη 


, Ν 
τοιαῦτα φρονίμως καὶ μετὰ 
A a € ε XN 
σπουδῆς παρήνει ὁ Z, οἵ de 
καίπερ ὑπακούειν αὐτῴ 
5 / f 7 
εἰωθότες, τότε μέντοι... 


εἰρημένον δι’ ὀκτὼ ἐτῶν Νισαίαν 
ἀποδοῦναι, ὡς 6 χρόνος 
ἐτελεύτησεν, ἠξίου παραλα- 


βεῖν 


ἄλλοθι 


ἔδρασαν 


ἈΝ , μὺ 
τοὺς πυθόμενος οἷα 
29) x 53. A 
οὐδ᾽ αὐτὸς ἀξιῶν 


λείπεσθαι, ἐστράτευσεν 


ἐν ᾧ ταῦτα ἐδήλουν τοιόνδε τι 


a cf a »Ὗ lal 
ἐγένετο ὥστε καὶ μᾶλλον 
πιστεύειν, ἁλοὺς γὰρτις... 


NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND IDIOM. 9 


ὃ 19, More commonly still the artificiality consists in 
obscuring the real agent. If we ask ourselves the simple 
questions ‘What is really done?’ and ‘ Who really does 
it?’ there will often be no further clue required towards 
a simple and idiomatic translation. 


i. 6. she feared she would have ... μὴ πράγματα παρέχωσιν 
an insurrection on ἐκεῖνοι νεωτερίσαντες 
hand 

ii. 5. he detained her while he προστάξας τινὰ ἵνα... ἐπίσχοι, 
climbed... αὐτὸς ἀνέβη. .. 


vi. 5. utteringdireful prayers, δεινὰ ἐπηρῶντο. ἐκπεπληγ-. 
they astonished the μένοι δὲ οἱ Ῥωμαῖοι... 
Romans... 


vi. 7. they were yoked with φρουρίοις αὐτοὺς κατεῖχον 
garrisons 


vi. 8. his back lay open to the ὁ δὲ τὰ ὄπισθεν ἐκινδύνευέ τι 
occasion of losing σφαλῆναι 


x. 1. he had traitors among προδιδόντες τινὲς τῶν οἰκετῶν 
his servants, who ἤγγελλον 
warned... . 


x. 5. he was met and re- τῶν ξυνωμότων τις ἐπιτυχὼν 
cognised by one of ἀνέγνω 
the conspirators 


ὃ 14. Or the real act may be obscured. 

i. 4, [he was to take her (va τῇ πομπῇ παρείη, ἐν ἣ οὐδὲν 
alive] that she might ἤμελλε μᾶλλον θαυμά- 
form the most attrac- (er Oar 
twe spectacle in his 
triumph 


§ 15. Another very common and important form of 
artificiality in English is the concealed Oratio Obliqua: 


feeling. 
ii. 4. a threat of violence 


might drive the 
queen to... 


- ii. 2. delay might cause loss 
of the prize 


iv. 3. they could scarcely 
break open the 
house and seize... 

she was 


v. 3. now again 


- confronted with ἃ 


similar difficulty 


§ 16. Or, again, the artificiality may be due rather 7 


} _ thought,’ ‘they felt, etc., and gives a vivid and dra 
colour to the narrative: but it must be turned intc 
explicit Obliqua in Greek, or else the sense is lost. 
speech or feeling must be given plainly as a speech 


»- 
a 


ὁ δὲ ἀπειλαῖς μὲν οὐκ Τὰς 
χρῆσθαι, phe. 
ἣν μέλλωσι, ΠΥ Πτον εἶναι. μὴ 


σφαλῶσι 


οὐκ ἤθελον διαρρήξαΣ Ι 
οἰκίαν ξυλλαβεῖν... 


i S a ee ar " : 
ἤσθετο αὖθις ἐς ταὐτὸ Kay 
στασα 


the epigrammatic, ironical, humorous, colloquial, or othe: 


styles, adopted in order in some way to give poin 
The rule in Greek is still to be plain and 
simple: the tone requires to be lowered: the more poin 


the narrative. 


expression to be interpreted. 


iv. 6, the stages of the farce 
being arranged 


~ v.2. she had gone far 
enough to commit 

herself — 
v. 5. his orders were out 
of date before he had 


started. 


ὥστε λόγῳ γοῦν τι ὑποσχέ 


πάντα ἐς τὴν ἀπάτην πα 


σκευασάμενοι te 


XN Let A ς 
πρὶν ἀνάγεσθαι τὸν 7p 


4 

ἃ ἐκέλευσεν αὐτὴ μετέ ἔγνω 
au 

ἭΝ ‘ 


| NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND IDIOM. 5 πὶ 
7. failure had taught cau- διὰ τῆν ἧσσαν εὐλαβέστερον. 
ἷ tion: caution would ἂν ἐπιχειρῆσαι ὥστε σαφέσ- 
insure victory . τατα δὴ νικήσειν 
4, we have no other οὐδὲν ἔχομεν ᾧ χρησόμεθα 
_ materials towork on : 7 
y. 1. you have a verdict κατεκρίνατε 
y. 2. till you begin to put μέχρι οὗ καταγνόντες καὶ ἐς 
the sentence into φυλακὴν ἀπάγειν πειρᾶσθε 
execution 


xvi. 3. It is in vain to evade μηδὲ ἐρωτώμενος és προφάσεις 
the question καταφύγῃς 


= ix, 3. not despairing of find- οὔπω és ἀνέλπιστον ἀπορίαν 
oe ing a solution of καταστάντα 
their difficulties 


ο΄ ix, 5. torepudiatetheirrule ἀποστῆναι 

5, he was taken, accord- κατὰ τὸ εἰωθὸς ἀπήγετο 

ing tothe usualmode 

of conveyance 

xvi. 2. a moment so critical καιρὸς τοσοῦτος 

ἢ and important | 

5. by adverting to the τοιαῦτα ἐνθυμούμενοι 

dignity of this high 

calling [he has just 

been speaking of 

‘our situation,’ ‘our 

place,’ ‘our station,’ 

‘the greatness of our 

trust ’| ; 

[For example of how, in answering objections — the 
ΤῊΝ ᾿ dialogue of Oa in Greek adds to ἐπ effect, 
ὅν 80 a3. | 


a ee νΣ Se Ὁ, Sar Tier gong ΑΛ a Iii te ἰνῶν δ ρος γι δ 1} na ie il 
ais Cs ttt ee ey eh ey) ‘ 7). ats et, oe - 


<~ 5 ἊΝ aig τ ἢ, ΤΩ ἐκ... _ fe a af τᾶν + Th ee ee 


12 «NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND Dom, 


us even to add something which is omitted in t 
~ English. | 


In vi. 3 [see the passage] it is smoother to add the wor oa 
ἀφικόμενος at the aa If you were writi ng ᾧ 


it at this point. 


In vi. 5, and again xv. 2, where we have an indec: 
state, a state of waiting, followed by a decisive — 
act or result, the insertion of τέως helps to make be 

it clearer. ay Sy 

vi. 5. stood in amaze... ἐκπεπληγμένοι τέως μὲν ἡσύ ν 
at length awak- χαζον, τέλος δέ... 
ened - 


xv. 2, the Irish will be τέως μὲν oixretpovres εὖλα - 
quiet ... feeling HOOVTAL ... ἐπειδὰν δέ ae 
interest . .. but a 
when the door 
of the jail has 
closed... 


In vii. 5, ‘nor did these pursue in any time’ will be clear 
we say, ‘And at last when they did poe | 
did not catch them.’ 


In viii. 2, ‘the king said he was sorry for that occasio’ 
coming to them’ is clearer if we add the o 
half of the real antithesis: ‘he was sorry to 
but he was forced’: which is what the word 

‘occasion,’ rather less clearly, conveys. “- ; 

fh x. 3. ‘Henry would not act against so high a noble . ng 
but privately he sent . . .’ is made clearer 

add ‘publicly’ (φανερῶς Ἡξὴ to the first el 


t 
ie 


ΤῊ 
ix 

[2 5 J 

rm 

ret 

2 


NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND IDIOM. 13 


8 19. A special case of this is the following. When the 
circumstances which lead up to an act (or a conclusion) 
have been detailed at length, it is common in Greek, and 
it adds to the clearness, to insert a swmmarising expres- 
sion. The examples will show what the usage is. 
iy. 2, 3, 4. [Afterexpounding In Greek it would be better 

all the difficulties of to say—ratra οὖν ἐνθυμού- 
the ephors, the Eng- μενοι διενοοῦντο, K.T.X. 

lish goes on, ὃ 4.] ° 

‘The services of 

Hyrlas were there- 

fore put in requisi- 


Ch ie 
vi. 6. [The Romans were In Greek, τότε δὴ ἀναθαρσή- 
amazed: then the σαντες, K.T.A. 


general encouraged 
them: told them not 
to fear barbarians: 
the English goes on] 
‘they fell on and 


beat them 
xi. 1. they earned their ἐν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς ds ἐπετρέποντο 
triumphs __ because εὖ πράξαντες οὕτω δὴ ἐπόμ- 


they had conducted πευσαν. 
themselves well in 

the offices to which 

they had been ap- 

pointed. 


§ 20. The Greek being a naturally vivacious language, 
we find a constant tendency, not only in speech and 
dialogue but also in ordinary narrative, to the use of 6%, 
dpa, δῆθεν, which may be called dramatic particles. It 
requires some little experience to know the right places 
where to insert these; and the student will begin by not 


, 


using them enough, and perhaps go on to use 
much; but he may be helped by noting he 


(a) Pretence, allegation, ete. 
fot (he affected to weep) ὀδύρεσθαι δὴ προσεποιεῖτι 
iv. 7. (In this seeming ex- ὁ δὲ ὡς ἔσχατα νων: ann; 

tremity) 
(b) the suggested motive. ἬΝ 
ii. 4. (did not threaten lest μὴ ἑαυτὴν δὴ βιάσαιτο 
she should commit : 
suicide) 
(c) a burst of feeling. 
11, 5. (they had not left their οὐ τούτου δὴ ἕνεκα hao 
brethren . . . for .. . ἀπολιπεῖν . 
LBiS"S 5) 
(d) a parenthetic explanation. 


vi. 2. (for they, it seems, had φύγαδας yap δὴ ile 
entertained _—fugi- 
tives) 


(6) ὦ suspicion. : 
ix. 1. (perceiving the king γνοὺς ἀθυμοῦντα τὶ τὸν ἐξ τι 


was depressed... - καὶ ὑποπτεύων μὴ 
and suspecting he ἄρα παρασκευάξται 
was quietly prepar- | “Ὲ 
TS τς “Ὁ 1.) 


(f) a natural consequence. ; 
ix. 1, (suspecting this, he ταῦτα ὑποπτεύων, ἐνεθυμ, 


reflected) 
(g) nusplaced mirth and 
disappointment. 
(he ridiculed the mes- καταγελῶν δὴ ὠλιγ ι 
sengers, and accord- διώκων οὐκέτι δὴ κατέλαβε 


ingly, when he did 
pursue, failed to 
catch the troops) 


NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND IDIOM. 15 


§ 21. Lastly, we may just mention what is perhaps the 
most obvious point of all, namely, the continuous character 
of Greek, compared with the comminuted or short uncon- 
nected sentences so common in modern English. 

This is specially the case with narrative: and in the 
more extreme cases not even beginners would fail to notice 
the difference and make their Greek more connected than 
the English. It is the less obvious instances that are 
worth illustrating: where the sentences in English, though 
not too abrupt to be turned as they stand, yet are better 
bound up in Greek into one longer sentence, in order to 
bring out the logical connection. 

i. 1. She was not long in re- ov διὰ πολλοῦ πυθομένη... 


ceiving intelligence... ἔπεμψεν. 
She sent to Murray... 


For various instances, see li. 2, 11. 3, iv. 1, v. 2, vill. 2, 
fees xt 1, xii. 5, xvii. 5. 


B. Minor Points of Ldiom. 


The minor points of idiom it would obviously be 

impossible to deal with or to classify exhaustively, as 
they would cover the whole field of the almost infinite 
detailed differences between a modern and an ancient 
language. Moreover, in my Jntroduction to Greek Prose 
Composition, I have attempted to treat systematically the 
more important of such differences. 
But it may help reference to these lectures if the points 
that emerge in the course of them are here collected and 
arranged. In the arrangement it may save trouble to 
follow the order of the Grammar. 


16 NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND IDIOM. 


rr rr rr ne .- een Rr 8g on ern ..----- --- -- 


(α) Noun usages. §§ 22-25. 


§ 22. The nominative is not unfrequently repeated at 
the end of the sentence distributively. 


iii, 1. Commanders and sol- χρῆσθαι ἐπεθύμουν τῇ νίκῃ Kat 
diers were hot for στρατηγοὶ καὶ στρατιῶται 
following up the vic- 
tory 


§ 23. The nominative is idiomatically used after compari- 
sons even where the main substantive is in another case. 


xvii. 1. (The dogs) at last like τελευτῶντας ἂν ὥσπερ οἱ ἄνθρω- 


men would make a TOL καταχρωμένους 
bad use of [their 
hands] 
§ 24. Enghsh nouns and names often conveniently 
turned by pronouns or adverbial expressions. uf 
i. 6. her own subjects οἱ ἐκεῖ, OF ob ἐκεῖσε, OF οἱ οἴκοθεν ᾿ 
iii. 5. the archduke ἐκεῖνος 


§ 25. When the nouns or names are such as are 
thoroughly unlike anything in Greek, we may sometimes 
find an expression that will give the feeling of the passage. 

Thus ‘infidels’ (iii 2) may be turned βάρβαροι, and 

‘Catholics’ (x. 5) ot πολέμιοι, of πέραν, οἱ ἐκεῖ, ete. 
For ‘guns’ and ‘pistols’ (vii. 2) use βέλος, τοξεύω, ete. 
For precise expressions of time, in Greek it is convenient 
often to be vaguer: thus 
‘on Tuesday,’ may be τῇ προτεραίᾳ, διὰ βραχέος, τότε, νεωστί, 
πάλαι, ἤδη ποτέ, etc., according to circumstances, 
‘at three o'clock,’ μετὰ μεσημβρίαν, περὶ δείλην, ὀψὲ, ete. 
‘in January, χειμῶνος, πρὶν ἔαρ γενέσθαι, ete. 


NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND IDIOM. 17 


Γ᾽ @) Adjective and Relative usages. §§ 26-29. 


§ 26. Strong adjectives are often idiomatically done by 
_ demonstratives in Greek: 
io. Oc 8 powerful party τοσούτοις ἀνδράσιν 
vi. 7. cruel rites τοιούτοις σφαγίοις 
Even repetition is conveniently avoided by τοιοῦτος 
‘an able man with an able son’ ξυνετὸς ἀνὴρ τοιοῦτον ἔχων 
υἱόν : 


vii. 3. [he should maintain ἐπιβουλεύουσι δὲ οὐδέν ὑπάρ- 


” their privileges: .. .} XElv τοιοῦτον 
but traitors had no 
privileges 


§ 27. The Predicative position of adjectives may be 
used with effect : 


ii. 1. to weep fora man so ὀδύρεσθαι... ὡς οἰκείου τε 
closely allied ἀποθανόντος ἀνδρός 
xiv. 5. They have made the μόνην εὐδόκιμον νίκην ταύτην. 
ἃ only honourable con- 
quests by... 


~~ §28. A constant tendency in Greek (for the sake of 
clearness or emphasis) is to put the Relatives first : 


careful of their pri- ἐπιμελέστερον φυλάσσει 


" 
᾿ 
Ἴ vill. 3. no man was more ὅσα μὲν γέρα ἔχουσιν, οὐδεὶς 
Σ ; 
‘ vileges 


vill. 4. he was resolved to ὅπου ἂν εὕρῃ, ξυλλαβεῖν βεβου- 
have them wherever’ λεῦσθαι 


he should find them 
B 


is 


18 NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND IDIOM. 


xv. 3. is it possible to be- dpa δυνατὸν ἐλπίζειν ὅντινα 
lieve that an agi- δημηγοροῦντα ἐτίμων ὅτε 
tator whom they εν τοῦτον ἧσσον τιμήσειν ; 
adored when he was 

. will lose his 
hold on their affec- 


tions... ἢ 

xvi. 5. to take away from us 4,7 dv σφαλερώτατον ἔχωμεν 
whatever is most ἀφελεῖν 
dangerous 


§ 29. The Relative ὅστις is used idiomatically in a con- 
cessive sentence (‘although’): 


xi. 2. youask what service he εἶτα ἐρωτᾶς, ποῦ ἐστρατεύσατο, 


has seen, though he ὅστις ἐν Κρήτῃ ὁπλίτης ἦν. 
has been a soldier in 
Crete . 


Verb usages. §§ 30-35. 


§ 30. The use of English pluperfect where Greeks have 
the aorist is the most constantly recurring point of 
idiom : 7 3 


ii. 3. he sent an officer to ἐς τὸ οἴκημα... «ἔπεμψεν, 


the place where otrep Ἀντώνιον τότε ἐκόμισαν 
Antonius had been 
carried 


For other examples, see v. 1, v. 4, vi. 2, vi. 8, viii. 2. 


§ 31. The use of μέλλω, and not the future participle, 
should be noticed, in cases like the following : ‘ 
iii, 4, [seeing himself entrap- μέλλοντα ἀπολέσθαι [ποῦ 
ped,| with de- ἀπολούμενον] ᾿ 
struction awaiting 
him 
See explanation, p. 41. 


NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND IDIOM. 19 


§ 32. Animportant difference concerns the use of verbs 
of motion, as exemplified below: 
I went to him im his ἐς αὐτὸν πρὸς τὴν οἰκίαν 
house ἦλθον 


71; requesting himto meet ἀξιοῦσα ἐς Ποτιδαίαν ἀπαν- 
her at Potidaea τῆσαι. 


§ 33. Another very common idiom is the use of the 
Passive in English corresponding to the Active in Greek : 


~ he ordered the statue ἐκέλευσε τὸν ἀνδρίαντα χρυσοῦν 
to be gilt 


v. 4. by the terms, Calais εἰρημένον ἐν ταῖς σπονδαῖς τὴν 
wastobe restored Νισαίαν ἀποδοῦναι 


viii. 4. he expected they ἠξίου πέμψαι 
should be sent 


The real principle is that Greek directness and simpli- 
city prefers to describe somebody doing rather than some- 
thing done : and where the agent is obvious, from common 
sense or the context, to omit him. See the full explana-_ 
tion on page 71. 

So where English is active, very often in Greek the 
official who does the thing is omitted: 


iv. 1. he ordered the porter συμφράξαι ἐκέλευσε τὴν θύραν 
to shut the door 


§ 34. The treatment of Interrogations raises a point 
or two of idiom. 

(a) In direct speech, it is sometimes more lively to put 
a point in Greek interrogatively : 


20 


our dominions 
abroad are the 
root of this sedi- 
tion] it is not 
intended to cut 
them off . 


xiii, 3. [If 


(Ὁ) On the other ἐπεὶ the Interrogation in a eae 
Speech (Oratio Obliqua), so common in Latin and Eng 
is not a Greek usage; but some verb must be introdu 


The enemy (he aa had 
come : how could they repel 
them ? 


See explanation on p. 54. 


-§ 35. One regular usage of Oratio Obliqua is very 


[εἰ ἐκ τῆς ἔξωθεν ἀρχῆς 
ἡ στάσις] πότερον ἐὶ 
3 / »- 
ἐξορύξουσιν... ; 


Keyra TOV πολεμίων, ἀ ἀπορ ᾿ 
ὅπως ἀμυνοῦνται. 


portant and often overlooked. The rule is this:— _ 


normal accusative and infinitive. 
various examples will clear up the point: τος 


he asked why they blamed 
him: he had done no harm 
to anybody 

he advised them not to let any 
one go; nor to open the 
gates: no one knew of the 
plot 


a hint was given him that he 
would not survive it: His 
enemies intended to catch 
him 

they reported that the army 
was on the point of surren- 
dering: failure of the sup- 
plies made them desperate 


ἤρετο διὰ τί αἰτιῶνται" a 
yap οὐδένα ἀδικῆσαι. 


ἔπειθε μηδένα ἀφιέναι μηδὲ 
/ > A a7 > 
πύλας ἀνοῖξαι: οὐδένα γ 
ἐπίστασθαι οἷα ἐπιβου) 
σιν ν a 
ὑπεσύμηνς τις ὡς οὐκέτι. “Ef 
γενήσεται" δια Beal 


‘ 2 \ > as ἃς : 
τοὺς ἐχθροὺς ἀποκτεῖναι ᾿ 


” »' ‘ ε Ν μ 
ἤγγειλαν ὅτι ὁ στρατὸς μ 


“ (4 ὦ 
ἐνδοῦναι" ἀπολιπόντων 
τῶν ἐπιτηδείων ἐν ὁ 
εἶναι ᾿ 


NOTES ON STRUCTURE AND /DIOM. 21 


Adverbs, etc. §§ 36-37. 


§ 36. The pregnant use of prepositions and adverbs may 
be illustrated by the following: 
| i. 6. she was ready to aid τοῖς ἐκεῖσε ἤθελε ξυμπράσσειν 
the Scotch [for τοῖς ἐκεῖ] 


vi. 4. thick on the shore οἱ ἐκ τῆς γῆς συχνοὶ συνέστα- 
they stood [threat- σαν 
ening | 

vil. 2. those in the cottage οὐδὲν βέλος ἀφίεσαν οἱ ἐκ τῆς 
did not shoot at κώμης. 
them 


Again, in a totally different application of the principle: 


x. 5. he told the story to πρὸς τοὺς ἄρχοντας πάντα 
the authorities [1.6. ἐμήνυσεν. 
P he went and told| 


SS § 37. The negative method of expression is particularly 
᾿ς common in Comparisons in Greek : 


11, 4. she would form the οὐδὲν ἔμελλε μᾶλλον ἐκείνης 


most altractiwe spec- θαυμάζεσθαι. 
tacle , 
vi. 1. emulating others, whose τοὺς ἄλλους πυθόμενος οἷα 
: deeds he had heard ἔδρασαν οὐδ᾽ ἀξιῶν αὐτὸς 
οἵ λείπεσθαι 


vii. 4. this was the greatest οὐδ᾽ ἄλλο κάκιον οὐδὲν ἔπαθον 
damage they sus- 


tained 

xi. 2. he only spared from οὐδέποτε τὸ στρατόπεδον ἀπέ. 
his military duties λειπεν, εἰ μὴ ὅσον wero 
so much time as he δεῖν. 


Ε; thought best 


ao 


a 
5 


te 
é 


LECTURES. 


I.—_QUEEN OF SOOTS. 


1. Tur Queen of Scots was not long in receiving in- 
telligence of what the lords intended against her. She 
sent to Murray, requesting him to meet her at Perth. 2. As 
he was mounting his horse a hint was given him that if 
he persisted he would not return alive, and that Darnley 
and Rizzio had formed a plan to kill him. He withdrew 
- to his mother’s castle and published the occasion of his 
disobedience. 3. Mary replied with a counter charge 
that Murray had proposed to take her prisoner and carry 
off Darnley to England. Both stories are probably true. 
4, Murray’s offer to Randolph is evidence sufficient 
against himself. Lord Darnley’s conspiracy was no 
more than legitimate retaliation. 5. Civil war was fast 
approaching: and it is impossible to acquit Elizabeth of 
having done her best to foster it. 6. Afraid to take an 
open part lest she should have an insurrection on her 
hands at home, she was ready to employ to the uttermost 
the aid of the Queen of Scots’ own subjects, and trusted 
to diplomacy or accident to extricate herself from the 
consequences. : 
σ 


26 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


of what the lords intended against her. She sent 
: Murray, peat him to meet her at Perth. 


which Mary acted, (0) of the action: and the connectic nD 
between the two is therefore close and obvious. : 
nothing else to note in the structure. : ᾿ 

In the phrasing note a few small points. For the names, — 
as usual, employ Greek names, or the convenient pronouns. ὦ 
For ‘lords’ [not δεσπότης, κύριος, κοίρανοι, or any other 
poetical terms the dictionaries may give, but] say οἱ ὀλέγοι, 
or of ἐν τέλει, or of δυνατοί, or even perhaps of ἔφορι 
(suggestive roughly of respective powers of king and h: 
officials). ‘Intend against, ἐπιβουλεύω; we might sa 
διανοεῖσθαι κατά (g.) or ἐπὶ (a.): but ‘plot’ is commone: 
Observe specially ‘to meet at Perth’ [half will translate 
literally, using ἐν]. The English idiom is to use one pre- — 
position of motion, with the person ; the Greek requires both — 
person and place to depend on the verb, and therefore 1 
place must also have prep. of motion (29. English says, £ 
went to him in his house,’ Greek, és αὐτὸν πρὸς τὴν οἰκία 
So here, ἐς Ποτιδαίαν. 

The piece then begins: ἡ δὲ οὐ διὰ πολλοῦ ruc 
ἐπεβούλευον ἐκεῖνοι ἄγγελον ἔπεμψεν ὡς τὸν ate 
ἀξιοῦσα ἐς ἸΤοτιδαίαν ἀπαντῆσαι. 


2. As he was mounting his horse a hint was given him ¢. 
if he persisted he would not return alive, and that Dar1 
and Rizzio had formed a plan to kill him. He withdr 
_to his mother’s castle and published the occasion a of 
disobedience. 2 


a ae | QUEEN OF SCOTS. 27 


- 


: action. Care must be taken about ‘As he was mounting 
his horse” If we do it literally, it will suggest to the 
matter-of-fact Greek that some one whispered in his ear as 
he was actually climbing. We might use μέλλω ἀναβαίνειν, 
but probably it is more natural to say, ‘While he was pre- 
paring his horse.’ Again, ‘if he persisted’ is obscure: we 
must say plainly, ‘if he went.’ ‘To his mother’s castle’ 
[for which many will say, és τὸν τῆς μητρὸς πύργον] 
‘sounds rather grotesque in Greek, as πύργος is poetic, 
_ and we do not expect ‘mothers’ to have ‘castles.’ It is 
more natural to say, ‘to his mother to a fortified place’: 
_ and ‘to’ with the person will be παρά. ‘Occasion of | 
_ his disobedience’ make concrete as usual: ‘ why he did not 
obey.’ 

The whole sentence will then be: ὁ δὲ ἐν ᾧ παρεσκευά- 
ζετο τὸν ἵππον, ὑποσημαίνοντός τινος ὡς ἐὰν ἐκεῖσε in, 
οὐκέτι περιγενήσεταν (τὸν γὰρ Ἱππίαν καὶ τὸν “Ριζαῖον 
μέλλειν ἀποκτεῖναι), παρὰ τὴν μητέρα ἀπεχώρει ἐς χωρίον 
TL ἐχυρόν, καὶ πᾶσι διήγγειλε διὰ τί τῇ ἀδελφῇ οὐκ 
ἐπείθετο. : 


Note περιγενήσεται, ‘come out of it alive.’ 
_ The parenthesis, which gives the reason, is acc. with inf., the 
usual form into which oratio obliqua slides after the first clause. 


8, Mary replied with a counter charge that Murray had pro- | 
posed to take her prisoner and carry off Darnley to England. 
Both stories are probably true. 


‘Replied with a counter charge’ must be made concrete: 
‘herself too charged him.’ ‘Both stories are probably 
true’ must be made personal [beginners will say ἀμφότεροι 
οἱ λόγοι, or perhaps, still worse, μῦθοι]. It will be sufficient 
to say, ‘It is probable that each accused truly.’ 


28 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. lanes 


4. Murray’s offer to Randolph is evidence sufficient against 
himself. Lord Darnley’s conspiracy was no more than 
legitimate retaliation. 


These two clauses are both obscure and full of abstracts; 


they require great care to bring out the full sense. We 
must consider what is the exact fact meant and the exact 


argument conveyed in the allusive and terse sentences. It 
is somewhat as follows :-— 


‘Murray was proved to be conspiring, since he had made > 


such an offer’ (we do not exactly know, without the context, 
what the offer was, but the convenient τοιαῦτα will suffice) 
‘to Randolph; and Darnley in plotting was justly repaying 
what he had suffered’: or ‘had the right to plot in his turn 
(ἀντεπιβουλεῦσαι) against those who had conspired against 
him. As to the words: ‘take prisoner’ is συλλαβεῖν; ia 
‘offer’ is ὑποσχέσθαι ; ‘carry off’ might be on or, 
as it was perhaps by sea, διακομίσαι. oe: 

We then get: ἡ δὲ καὶ αὐτὴ αἰτίαν ἐπέφερεν ὡς ἐπιβου- 
λεύσαντι ἑαυτὴν μὲν ξυλλαβεῖν τὸν δὲ Ἱππίαν ᾿Αθηνάζε 
διακομίσαι" καὶ εἰκὸς δὴ ἀληθῆ ἐγκαλεῖν ἑκάτερον" ὁ μὲν 
γὰρ Μάριος δῆλος ἣν τι ἐπιβουλεύων ἐπεὶ τοιαῦτα τῷ 
Δελφινίῳ ὑπέσχετο’ ὁ δὲ “Ἱππίας ξυνομόσας δικαίως 
ἅπερ ἔπασχεν ἀντημύνετο (or the last clause) δίκαιος δὴ 
ἣν τοῖς γε ξυνομόσασιν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὸν ἀντεπιβουλεῦσαι. 


5. Civil war was fast approaching: and it is impossible to 
acquit Elizabeth of having done her best to foster it. 


In 5 it is better to avoid abstracts [στάσις mpoones, or, 
Worse, πόλεμος τῶν πολιτῶν, not Greek], and to make 
the subject of the verb as usual the persons concerned : 
ἑκατέρωθεν ὅσον οὔπω ἐστασίαζον, or μόνον οὐκ ἐς 
πόλεμον ἤδη κατέστησαν, or something of the kind, will 
be satisfactory. 


1.] as QUEEN OF SCOTS. κυρ iss 


‘Foster’ will give rise to metaphorical mistranslations 
[τρέφω, etc.]; we must say ‘urge on’ προτρέπω, or ‘ pro- 
mote’ πράσσω, or perhaps simply, best of all, προθυμεῖσθαι, 
or πρόθυμος εἶναι. 

The greatest difficulty, however, is with the phrase ‘it is 
impossible to acquit.’ It will not do to translate it literally 
[ov δυνατὸν ἀπολῦσαι, οὐκ ἄν δύναιτο ἀπολῦσαι, οἴο.], 
because ἀπολύω, “ to acquit,’ is a metaphor from law-courts, 
and so inappropriate. We might say οὐδεὶς ἂν ἀμφισ- 
βητοίη μὴ οὐ τοῦτο προθυμεῖσθαι THv”EXoocayv: or per- 


haps it would be sufficient to write καὶ πᾶσι δῆλον ὡς 


τοῦτο προὐθυμεῖτο, etc. 


6. Afraid to take an open part lest she should have an insur- 
rection on her hands at home, she was ready to employ to 
the uttermost the aid of the Queen of Scots’ own subjects, 
and trusted to diplomacy or accident to extricate herself 
from the consequences. 


In 6, ‘to take an open part’ is simplest if φανερῶς τι 
πρᾶξαι be used. 

‘Have an insurrection on her hands.’ We had best change 
the subject from Elizabeth, who suffers, to the insurgents, who 
act: it is the constant tendency of Greek to revert to this, 
the most primitive and natural mode of expression. We can 
say μὴ πράγματα παρέχωσι οἱ οἴκοθεν νεωτερίσαντες, 
where the sense of ‘have on her hands’ is given by the term 
πράγματα παρέχειν, ‘to give trouble. We might still 
more briefly say μὴ οἱ οἴκοθέν τι νεωτερίσωσιν : but per- 
haps a point is lost, and the other therefore better. 

‘The Queen of Scots’ own subjects’ may be conveniently 
abridged into τοῖς ἐκεῖ, or, more idiomatically and expres- 
sively, τοῖς ἐκεῖσε (implying messages and negotiations sent 
to them): this will save ἀρχόμενοι, or ὑπήκοοι, and other 
lumbering expressions. ‘Diplomacy’ will lead to various 


_unnatural words of different degrees of harshness [τέχνη, 


neatest ees is γνώμη, eee: opaceatal to τύχη. 
sequences’ is instructively idiomatic: it means ‘ 
consequences,’ ‘the difficult or dangerous consequence 
the important predicate is suggested only in English, Ὁ 
should be expressed in Greek. Porters κίνδυνος ca 
smoothest word. [Many will say τὰ μέλλοντα, or 
ἀποβαίνοντα, vague and unnatural; some will 8 
᾿ἀποβησόμενα, doubly impossible. | 

The whole ean Ea passage δ and 8) will chen 
ἑκατέρωθεν δ᾽ οὖν ἐς πόλεμον ὅσον οὔπω κατέστ 
οἱ πολῖται: καὶ πᾶσι δῆλον ὡς τοῦτο οὐχ AR 
προὐθυμεῖτο ἡ "λισσα. φανερῶς μὲν yap τι 1 
οὐκ ἐτόλμησεν, μὴ πράγματα παρέχωσιν οὗ οἵ 
νεωτερίζοντες" λάθρα δὲ τοῖς ἐκεῖσε ἐς “πάντα 
ξυμπράσσειν, ὡς τοῦ κινδύνου ἢ γνώμῃ ἢ wad 


περιγενησομένη. 


Ι ᾿ Note (1) δ᾽ οὖν, arise the question of who was to blam 
et reverting to facts ;—(2) οὐχ ἥκιστα, common meiosis for 
_ English ‘done her best’ ;—(3) λάθρα δέ, pointing contrast to ¢ 
μέν, making the sense clearer than in the English ;—(4) ἢ x 
a little more dramatic than the English, suggesting her reckles: 


cen 


Il.—DEATH OF ANTONY. 


1. A SLAVE had brought the fatal dagger to Octavius, 


and exhibited the blood of his enemy still reeking upon it. 
The conqueror affected to weep for a man so closely allied ἡ 
_ __ to him, and one who had held so eminent a place in the 
ΔΆ commonwealth. 2. He pretended to be anxious to justify 


himself to those about him, and showed them the letters 


_ which had passed between them, in which his own 


moderation and the arrogance of his rival were conspicu- 


ἢ ously displayed. 3. In the meantime he sent a trusty 
officer, Proculeius, to the place whither Antonius had 
3 been carried in the agonies of death. The wounded man 
had already breathed his last; the doors of the massive 
_ sepulchre were closed, and the women refused to admit 
5 their strange visitor. 4. A threat of violence might drive 


was strictly charged to preserve her alive, partly for the 


sake of the hidden treasures which she alone, it was 
supposed, could reveal, and partly that she might form 
the most attractive spectacle in the destined triumph of 
Octavius. 5. Proculeius contrived to detain her in con- 
versation with a confederate at the door, while with one 


or two soldiers he climbed by a ladder to the upper 
story. 


31 


a2 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


.-------- -.--..-.-....- "πσυσννονταανσασαυ σπαραμισοα: 


1. Reading the first two sentences— 


A slave had brought the fatal dagger to Octavius, and exhibited 
the blood of his enemy still reeking upon it. The con- 
queror affected to weep for a man so closely allied to him, 
and one who had held so eminent a place in the common- 
wealth 


—we notice that the subject is different from that of the 
piece generally. The whole passage is about Octavius, and 
the first two clauses describe the actions of the slave. But 
as these actions are the occasion of Octavius’ affecting to 
weep, etc., it is more in accordance with the Greek con- 
tinuous style to keep Octavius the subject, and put the slave — 
in a subordinate sentence. We shall then say, ‘Octavius, — 
when the slave, etc. . . . reeking upon it, affected to weep,’ 
etc. This will also conveniently get rid of ‘the conqueror, — 
which has no special point here, and is merely used in 
Merivale’s somewhat stiff English as a synonym for Octavius. 

Secondly, note ‘fatal’ dagger. [Everybody will put . 
θανάσιμος, ὀλέθριος, or some such word.] These will not 
read naturally: why? The reason is instructive, and applies” 
to many similar adjectives in English’ when we are translat- 
ing into Greek: namely, the word ‘fatal’ is not part of the 
story; it is not a descriptive but an allusive epithet. If — 
he had said the ‘long’ dagger, the ‘sharp’ dagger, the 
‘enemy's’ dagger, the adjective would have been wanted. 
‘Fatal’ only implies that it was the dagger which had 
wounded Antony ; and if we wish to express this, we must not 
do it by an allusive epithet, but directly, ἡ ἐκεῖνος διεφθάρη, or 
some such plain phrase. But the context tells us sufficiently 
that it was the dagger which had struck him, and ‘ fatal’ 
should be omitted. 

Again, ‘his enemy’ is periphrasis for ‘Antony,’ which 
therefore we shall substitute. ‘Reeking’ is too imagina- 
tive a word for Greek: the plain fact was that the dagger 
was ‘bloody,’ and that is enough. ‘For a man so closely 


II.] DEATH OF ANTONY. 3 33 


allied’ gives the reason for his affected grief, and can be 
—conyeniently done with ὡς and the participle: the alliance 
refers to the fact that Antony had married Caesar’s sister 
Octavia, and is sufficiently rendered by οἰκεῖος. 

With these hints the sentence can be easily turned as follows: 
ὁ μὲν οὖν ᾿Οκτάφιος, ἐπειδὴ δοῦλός τις TO ἐγχειρίδιον 
νεωστὶ ἐξημαγμένον παρέσχεν, ὀδύρεσθαι δὴ προςεποιεῖτο 
ὡς οἰκείου τε ἀποθανόντος ἀνδρὸς καὶ εὐδοκίμου ἐν τῇ 
πόλει γενομένου. 

Note 67, dramatic particle, eminently suitable to a clause describing 
pretence. Note also the position of οἰκείου, giving strong prominence 


to the predicate. The re... καὶ shows that εὐδοκίμου is also 
predicate. 


2. In the next sentence we must first observe the struc- 
ture— 

He pretended to be anxious to justify himself to those about 
him, and showed them the letters which had passed between 
them, in which his own moderation and the arrogance of his 
rival were conspicuously displayed. 

The first clause here being causal may be put in the parti- 
ciple, and then ‘showed’ will be the principal verb. In the 
last clause the abstracts ‘moderation’ and ‘arrogance’ will 
have as usual to be recast: and seeing that the clause virtu- 
ally contains the motive for his showing the letters, it had 
better be put oblique, somewhat in this way: ‘Wherein he 
thought that he should appear reasonable and the other 
arrogant.’ 

As to the phrasing, ‘ pretended’ may be given by ws. For 
‘justify’ we might use δικαιοῦν [beginners will say δικάζειν, 
or some such horror], but the simplest word is ἀπολογεῖσθαι. 
For ‘letters which had passed between them’ relative or 


participial constructions will be clumsy [τὰς γεγραμμένας, —. 


Tas ἀποδοθείσας, ἐπιστολὰς al ἐπέμφθησαν, and other 
worse versions], and it will be sufficient to say, ‘the letters 
of each,’ τὰς ἑκατέρου. 


34 ‘LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


The whole passage will then be: ἐν δὲ τοῖς παροῦι 


ἐπέδειξεν, ἡ AUTOS μὲν ἐπιεικὴς WETO φανεῖσθαι, ἐκεῖνον, Σ 
δὲ μεῖζόν τι φρονοῦντα. 

We might have said in the last line ἤδη γὰρ αὐτὸς piv 
ἐπιεικὴς φανούμενος, ete. bai a 


3. In the next two sentences— . τῶ 


os it 


In the meantime he sent a trusty officer, Proculeius, to the 
place whither Antonius had been carried in the agonies of i, 
death. 'The wounded man had already breathed his last ; bie 
the doors of the massive sepulchre were closed, and the Se 
women refused to admit their strange visitor ce 


Γ 


—we observe first that the style, as usual in English rapid 
narrative, consists of short clauses, which in the Greek must 3 
be more linked together. ‘The wounded man’ in the aoe é 
where it comes is merely a picturesque synonym for Antony ; — i ν 
-if it is to form part of the story it must be put in the natural 
place, 1.6. in the previous clause. . ae 

‘Agonies of death,’ again, is conventional; the simpler ἵν 
Greek will merely say ‘ dying, or ‘in a grievous state.’ ee | 

‘Breathed his last’ is again a conventional an 
the Greeks say simply τελευτῶν. 

The whole sentence will be: ἐν δὲ τούτῳ Προκυλεῖον. 
πιστὸν ὄντα ἐς τὸ μέγα οἴκημα ἔπεμψεν, οἷπερ rn 


τὰς εὐ οὔτε ἐπ θ τὸν ee 
Note (1) that the tomb is in the English called first ‘ the place,’ a 


artificial style. In the simpler Greek it is better to say once for : 
‘the large chamber’ ;—--(2) the pluperfects ‘had been carried,’ ‘ 


veniently added to the first to indicate vaguely that it happen 
before ;—(3) the ‘ strange visitor’ is sufficiently given by simply say 
ing ‘the man’; or if it is shoughs preferable to express it as g 
the reason for the exclusion, say τὸν ξένον. 


ed wale Core τ ὺν 


ῬΑ ΟΡ ee Poe 
͵ Pe 


i ba 


ee —— 


_ DEATH OF ANTONY. 35 


4, The next sentence is the hardest: 


A threat of violence might drive the imprisoned queen to destroy 
herself, and the messenger was strictly charged to preserve 
her alive, partly for the sake of the hidden treasures which 
she alone, it was supposed, could reveal, and partly that 
she might‘form the most attractive spectacle in the destined 
triumph of Octavius. 

[Beginners will make all manner of mistakes here ; first, 
by translating ‘a threat of violence’ literally, whereas in 

Greek a threat cannot drive, but a man with a threat. 

Secondly, for ‘might drive’ they will use ἄν with the 

optative: but to a Greek reader this construction would 

mean the historian’s thought that it was likely to happen at 
the time he was writing. | 

The real fact is that it is a concealed oratio obliqua; it 
really expresses the misgiving of Octavius, or of Proculeius, 
and in Greek we must make this clear. The story may be 
best told thus: ‘But he was unable to use threats, lest the 
queen should destroy herself; for he had been strictly 
charged, etc. Again, ‘that she might form the most attractive 
spectacle, being thoroughly idiomatic English, cannot be done 


literally. [Beginners will say, ¢.9., θεάμα τὸ χαρίεστατον. 


The real main thought is not that she should ‘form a 
spectacle,’ but that she should ‘be present at the triumph.’ 

As to the phrasing, for ‘destroy herself’ the common 
expression is ἑαυτὴν βιάζεσθαι. ‘Preserve alive’ is 
ζωγρεῖν. ‘ Procession’ is πομπή. 

The whole passage will then be: ὁ δὲ ἀπειλαῖς μὲν οὐκ 
εἶχε χρῆσθαι, μὴ ἑαυτὴν δὴ βιάσαιτο ἡ βασίλεια. εἴρητο 
γὰρ ἕωγρεῖν, τοῦ τε χρυσοῦ ἕνεκα ὡς μόνην εἰδυῖαν ἢ 
κέκρυπται, καὶ τῇ πομπῇ ἵνα παρείη, ἐν ἡ οὐδὲν ἔμελλε 
μᾶλλον ἐκείνης θαυμάζεσθαι. 

Note (1) the dramatic δή where we give the motive ;—(2) the 
simplifying of the sentence about the treasure ;—(3) the convenient 


idiom of expressing the superlative ‘ most attractive spectacle’ by the 
negative and concrete phrase, ‘ nothing was likely to be more admired.’ 


Se ge el he συ ee Se aD ame ee aed ‘ 
> ae 


246 LECTURES ON GREEK PROS: 


5. The piece ends— 


 Proculeius contrived to detain her in conversation witl 
lm federate at the door, while with one or two soldi 
climbed by a ladder to the upper story. 


The English again is obviously artificial. If done litera 
[as beginners will do] it involves the absurdity of m a 


Twa ἐπιτάξας, ἵνα ἀρ ον αὐτὴν ἐπίσχοι, a τος 
ὀλίγων ἑπομένων διὰ κλίμακος ἐς τὸ ὑπερῷον ἀνέβη. Brot 


(2) the natural order of events is kept, ‘ posting ’—‘ conversi 
‘ detaining ’—‘ few followers ’—‘ ladder ’—‘ climbed.’ 


ITI,—ZAPENA., 


1. THESE arguments which had much logic in them 
were strongly urged by Zapena, whose counsels were 
usually received with deference. But on this occasion 
commanders and soldiers were hot for following up 
their victory. 2. They cared nothing for the numbers of 
the enemy: they cried, The more infidels the greater 
glory in destroying them. Delay might after all cause 
loss of the prize. 3. The archduke ought to pray that 
the sun might stand still for him that morning as for 
Joshua in the Vale of Ajalon. 4. The foe, seeing him- 
self entrapped, with destruction awaiting him, was now 
skulking towards his ships, which still offered him the 
means of escape. Should they give him time he would 
profit by their negligence, and next morning when they 
reached Nieuport, the birds would be flown. 5. Espe- 


cially the leaders of the mutineers were hoarse with 


indignation at the proposed delay. They had not left 
their brethren, they shouted, nor rallied to the arch- 
‘duke’s banner, in order to sit down and dig the sand lke 


ploughmen. 
37 


48 LECTURES ON GREER PROSE. 


1. The piece begins— 


These arguments which had much logic in them were saan 
urged by Zapena, whose counsels were usually received 
with deference. But on this occasion commanders and | Ξ: 
soldiers were hot for following up their victory. ae 


ee ζ 


The first point to notice is the artificial punctuation of the 3 


ae 
+3 


sentence. The thoughts are: Though the arguments were 
good, and strongly urged, and by a man generally listened to, δὲ 
they did not listen now: and accordingly the full stop 
‘deference’ must be disregarded. But as the sentence would i 
be a little heavy if the three clauses all came together under — = 
the word ‘though,’ it would be better to break them up, “9 
leaving the antithesis ‘he was usually listened to, but not | 
now, for a second half of the sentence. 

The rest of the difficulties concern the phrasing. — 
much logic’ is not like Greek at all: it will suffice to cai 
‘sensible. Again, on the Pango of grouping the ideas be 
to say ‘he argued sensibly, lan to say ‘ the argues 
words) were sensible.’ For ‘strongly urged’ we might u: 
the phrase πολὺς ἐγκεῖσθαι or διϊσχυρίξζομαι: but it w: 
perhaps be more convenient to couple two adverbial phrases, — 
and say ΡΠ} and with earnestness’: τοιαῦτα δὲ te ΩΝ 
“pos καὶ μετὰ σπουδῆς παρήνει ὁ Ζαποίνας. ΠΕ 

We shall then pass from what he did to what they did, and 
so change the subject at the natural place. ‘ But they, thoug 2 
usually they listened respectfully to him, now being victorious - 
were not willing to desist,’ or otherwise, ‘were anxious to — 
follow up their success’: and the nominative, as often hap- et, 
pens, may be repeated distributively at the end, ‘neither — 
soldiers nor generals,’ or ‘both soldiers and generals,’ accord 
ing as our sentence is positive or negative. As to the ph: 8 
ing, for ‘listened respectfully’ we may say πείθεσθαι o1 
ὑπακούειν: for ‘follow up’ we may use ἐπεξελθεῖν 
χρῆσθαι τῇ νίκῃ. 


ZAPENA. 39 


The second clause will then run: οἱ δὲ καίπερ ὡς ἐπὶ 

70 πολὺ πειθόμενοι αὐτῷ, or καίπερ ὑπακούειν αὐτῷ 

᾿ εἰωθότες, τότε μέντοι κατορθώσαντες χρῆσθαι ἐπεθύμουν 
τῇ νίκῃ καὶ λοχαγοὶ καὶ στρατιῶται. 


Next we have— 


2. They cared nothing for the numbers of the enemy : they cried, 
The more infidels the greater glory in destroying them. 
οϑῇ Delay might after all cause loss of the prize. 


The English here is to a beginner very misleading. The 
first sentence appears to be the words of the narrator; the 
second reports their cries; the third seems again the words 
of the narrator. As a fact, all three describe their feelings 
and the expression of them; the last clause being what so 
commonly occurs in English, a concealed oratio obliqua. Ac- 
cordingly in Greek the last two sentences will be oblique: 
the first one either leading up to it, or itself also oblique. 
That is, we may either say ‘(They said) they did not fear the 
numbers of the enemy: the more infidels the greater glory, 

ete. Delay might after all, etc.: or we may say ‘They did 
not care,’ etc. (oratio recta): ‘the more infidels,’ etc. (oratio 
obliqua): ‘ delays might, etc. (oratio obliqua). 

As to the phrasing: ‘numbers’ must be τὸ πλῆθος, or 
τοσούτους ὄντας, or, ‘however many the enemy might be,’ 
ὁπόσοι εἶεν. [The beginner will put ἀριθμός, or, worse, 
᾿ς ἀριθμοί, Again, ‘infidels’ he will render ἄπιστος (=un- 
faithful), or ἀσεβής (=impious): the latter at first sight a 
fair translation.] But the expression would look very unlike 
the usage of Greek prose. The reason is simple: the Greeks 
had no religious wars. The nearest corresponding feeling 
was the national prejudice against non-Hellenic enemies, whom 
they called βάρβαροι: I should therefore here use βάρβαροι. 
In the last clause we have three abstracts, delay, loss, prize: 
the sentence must, in accordance with our principles, be done 


40 | -~«<LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE, 


personally, and two at least will disappear. We shall tl 
have, ‘If they delayed, it was possible they might lose ie 
advantage,’ i | 

The whole sentence will then run: ov γὰρ τὸ πλῆθος 
δεδιέναι τῶν πολεμίων, ὡς ὅσῳ πλείονες εἶεν [or Vivid, - 
εἰσιν) οἱ βάρβαροι, τοσούτῳ μείζονι δόξῃ νικήσοντες" ἢν. ; 
δ᾽ ἔτι μέλλωσι, φοβερὸν εἶναι μὴ σφαλῶσι τοῦ κέρδος τ 
[or μὴ ἁμάρτωσιν ὧν ἐφίενται]. : 

In the second sentence, instead of τοσούτῳ μον δόξῃ ie 
νικήσοντες, we ΠΡ use the idiomatic accusative absolute 
with as, 49.) ὡς ὅσῳ πλείονες εἶεν οἱ βάρβαροι τοσούτῳ 
μείζονα ἐσομένην τὴν δόξαν νικήσασιν, ἃ turn which brings 
the true predicate (‘greater the glory’) into still clearer ] pro- ἃς 
minence. ee a 

[The beginner will use bad words for prize, GOdov, 
βραβεῖον, etc., and will make an abstract word subject of the — 
last clause, τὴν yap μέλλησιν τὸ ἄθλον ἂν ἀφελεῖν, ΟΣ 
is very unlike classical Greek. | aa 


bo 
ἀν 
- 


3. The archduke ought to pray that the sun might stand still 
for him that morning as for Joshua in the Vale of Ajales De 


No difficulty here in structure: ‘that the sun,’ etc., is, 0 
course, oblique petition, and acc. with infin.: some will i sure 
to put iva, ὡς, or ὅπως erroneously. ‘Vale, if looked ou: 
will probably bring the poetic words νάπη, or κλῖτυς," 
prose word for ‘vale’ being πεδίον, if needed at all, 
should translate: δεῖν τοίνυν τὸν στρατηγὸν εὔξασθαι. ( 
᾿Ἰωσῆς ἐλέγετο περὶ Αἴαλον) ἐπιστῆναι ἑαυτῷ τὸν ἥλιον 
ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ [or instead of ἐπιστῆναι, say ἀκίνη' 
γενέσθαι]. Just note that in the English ‘as for Josh 
etc., is made part of the prayer: it is more natural to mak 
it a simple narrative parenthesis, as in the Greek. 

1 πεδίον is usually translated ‘plain’; but ‘vale’ here means 


flat land at the foot of the hills, and that is exactly what the G 
πεδίον Means, 


es 


Seer il.} ZAPENA, ᾿" 4t 


_ 4. The foe, seeing himself entrapped, with destruction awaiting 
him, was now skulking towards his ships, which still 
offered him the means of escape. Should they give him 
time he would profit by their negligence, and next morn- 
ing, when they reached Nieuport, the birds would be 
flown. 


In the connected style of Thucydides—indeed in any 


narrative Greek prose—this would probably be all one 


sentence, broken by a colon in the middle. As to the 
structure: use Oratio Obliqua, as it is still the feelings of 
the army that are being described. In the phrasing, note 
‘the following points: ‘entrapped’ is too metaphorical for 
Greek, and we had better use some word like ἀπορία, or 
ἀμηχανῶν, or κατειλημμένος. ‘Seeing himself entrapped’ 
might be εἰδότα τὸν πολέμιον ἐν οἵᾳ ἀπορίᾳ κατέχεται. 
|The beginner will use two participles, one depending on 
another, always awkward: he will: say τοὺς πολεμίους 
αἰσθανομένους ἐμπλεκομένους, or something heavy like 
that: or else he will import what he conceives to be Greek 
metaphor for trap, ἐς φρέατα, or és παγίδα πεσόντας---Ὀοϑ- 


: sible, but unnatural and unidiomatic: the other far better. ] 


In the next, ‘ with destruction awaiting him,’ of course the 


abstract must be changed : μέλλοντα ἀπολέσθαι, or perhaps 


neater οὐδ᾽ ἂν οἰόμενον περιγενέσθαι (‘not even expecting 


he could escape’—negative turns being often idiomatic), 


[Beginners will say διαφθορὰν and such horrors: even more 
_ advanced students will use future participle, and say ἀπολου- 
μένους. Note specially that the present state of being about to do 
anything should always be done by μέλλω, never by future 
participle} ‘ Skulking’ ὑπεξιέναι, the ὑπὸ giving notion of 
secrecy. ‘The ships, which still offered, etc.: avoid the per- 
 sonification, as ships in Greek prose do not usually ‘ offer’ even 


| safety: and say‘ by which they still hoped to escape’ [the 


- beginner will say τὰς ναῦς τὰς ἔτι προτιθείσας σωτηρίαν, 
ΟἹ some such expression: clumsy structure, personified, 
D 


42 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


abstract, and προτ. the wrong word]. ‘Profit by negligence’ Ἢ 
will be χρήσεσθαι τῷ καιρῷ (‘use the opportunity’) or 
something of the kind: the idea ‘negligence’ is much better 
put into its natural and true place, namely in the protasis: 
‘should they be negligent.’ ‘The birds would be flown’is 
an English proverbial expression, to translate which literally 
would be absurd. [I have had τὰς ὄρνιθας mropévas ἂν 
εὑρεῖν and similar versions!!|] Even to put it as a simile (‘they 
would find them gone like birds’) is making far too much οὗ 
it: the plainer the better: say οὐδένα ἔτι καταλήψεσθαι. — 
The whole passage will then run: εἰδότα γὰρ Tov — 
πολέμιον ἐν ola ἀπορίᾳ κατέχεται Kal οὐδ᾽ ἂν οἰόμενον 


Δ. 


περιγενέσθαι ἐπὶ τὰς ναῦς (ἣ ἐλπὶς ἔτει σωθῆναι) λάθρα 
ς 7 Ἃ / 5 / / > “4 al a 
ὑπεξιεέναι: ἣν δέ τις ἀμελήσῃ, χρήσεσθαι αὐτόν τῷ καιρῷ, 
καὶ ἐπειδὰν τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ ἐς Νέον Améva ἀφίκωνται 
οὐδένα ἔτι καταλήψεσθαι. 


5. Especially the leaders of the mutineers were hoarse with 
indignation at the proposed delay. ‘They had not left — 
their brethren,’ they shouted, ‘nor rallied to the Arch- 
duke’s banner, in order to sit down and dig the sand like © 
ploughmen.’ 


ee Bl ee re ee Te 


Here, in the first clause, we revert to Oratio Recta, ‘aki 
the oblique again in the last sentence. In the phrasing, — 
‘especially’ is frequently οὐχ ἥκιστα : ‘leaders of mutineers’ 
may be of τὴν στάσιν πράσσοντες (‘those who were — 
arranging or promoting the sedition’: πράσσω very con- 
veniently vague and general in this sense): ‘were hoarse, 
of course avoid the elementary blunder of attempting this — 
phrase literally [τὴν φωνὴν ἐρρήγνυον or again éxepyov, 
quite impossible and absurd; διερρήγνυντο βοῶντες need- 
lessly strong], but use the idiomatic δεινὰ ἐποιοῦντο or 
ἐσχετλίαζον, adding βοῶντες if preferred. ‘At the pro- — 
posed delay,’ avoid abstract [ἐπὶ τῇ μελλούσῃ μονῇ, rather 
unidiomatic] and use the regular idiom after verbs of emotion, _ 


oe 


-- 


III.) ZAPENA. 43 


εἰ with the future : ‘proposed’ may then be simply done 
with οὕτω. ‘They had not left . . . inorder to, etc. Here 
is a real pitfall which will catch everybody. They will all 


begin οὐ yap τοὺς ἑταίρους ἀπολιπεῖν, etc., and then pro- 


ceed ἵνα καθήμενοι, etc. This is quite good grammar, and 
faithfully translated: but it will not do, for the simple 
reason that to a Greek reader it would convey that they had 
not left. their brethren, the exact opposite of the truth; and 
even if he gathered the correct meaning at last, he would 
have begun with a false impression, which he would after- 


wards have to go back and revise—the very thing, of all 


others, which a good narrative avoids. The whole difficulty 
is escaped by beginning ov τούτου ἕνεκα, and then following 


with the final sentence in its natural place. ‘ Rallied to the 


banner’ is of course technical metaphor, and there is no need 
for Tas τάξεις or TO στρατόπεδον, still less any attempt at 
‘banner’: but use simply the common word προσχωρεῖν, ‘to 
join. Lastly, ‘sit down and dig the sand like ploughmen’ 
is a vivid and startling phrase: but obviously the whole 
point of the indignant outburst is lost if we attempt to soften 
or paraphrase, and it must therefore be given literally. 

The whole passage will then be: καὶ ody ἥκιστα οἱ τὴν 
στάσιν πράσσοντες ἐσχετλίαζον καὶ δεινὰ ἐποιοῦντο, εἰ 
οὕτω διατρίψουσιν [or εἰ διατριβὰς τοιαύτας ἐάσουσι 
γενέσθαι], οὐ τούτου δὴ ἕνεκα φάσκοντες τοὺς μὸὲν 
σφετέρους ἀπολιπεῖν, ἐκείνῳ δὲ προσχωρῆσαι, ἵνα ἐγκα- 
θήμενοι τὴν ψάμμον ὡς γεωργοὶ ἐξορύττωσιν. 

Note δή, common where a burst of feeling comes in: it is, as it were, 
a dramatic gesture. Note also ἐκείνῳ for ‘the archduke’: often a 


simple pronoun will suffice instead of a name or title. 


a 


IV.—PHYILIDAS. 


1. MEANWHILE, as the slave had been arrested, Phyl 
lidas, sick with fears that he would confess under the 
rack, took to his bed. He ate nothing for three days, a 
lay barricaded in his house, giving orders to the porter to 
admit no one. 2. But the ες. having got all the} ἊΝ 
could out of the slave, found that there were secrets which — 
Phyllidas alone could explain: and the question was, how: 
to extract them. 3. They could scarcely break open he 
house and seize Phyllidas himself: for violence to a no 
Ambassador would be a mortal affront to the Theban 3, 
and the time for open hostilities was not yet. 4. Th 
services of the traitor Hyrlas were therefore again p 
requisition. 5. The slave had written from priso 


the farce having been "ae sik: arrange the κ᾿ 
for Hyrlas, aaa him, and ἩΜΙ͂Ν him contumac 
(as he had been told to be), loaded him with irons 
threatened him with torture. '7. In this seeming 
tremity he wrote to the Ambassador (the ephors of cou 
allowing the letter to go) and implored his aid, par tic 
larly inquiring what he might reveal, and what he sho 
try to hide even under the severest torture. 2 


showing him what was vital to conceal: and the 
was forthwith taken to the ephors. 


44 


PHYLLIDAS. | 45 


The first thing to notice in the first two sentences is, that 
it is all about the same person and the same set of facts, 
yiz., about what Phyllidas did when he was afraid. It is 
better under these circumstances to make it all one sentence, 
in the natural fashion of the Greek continuous style. 

_ The sentences run as follows :— 


1. Meanwhile, as the slave had been arrested, Phyllidas, sick 
with fears that he would confess under the rack, took to 
his bed. He ate nothing for three days, and lay barricaded 
in his house, giving orders to the porter to admit no one. 


In the details, the first point is the phrase ‘sick with fears’: 
it is best to say, ‘fearing lest, etc. . . . he lay as though 
sick,” ‘Under the rack,’ on the general principle of Greek, 
is a participle, ‘being tortured.’ Again, ‘to admit no one,’ 
is put in Greek a little more naturally and simply, ‘that no 
_ one should be admitted.’ 

The Greek will then be: συλληφθέντος δὲ τοῦ δούλου, 
ὁ ᾧ. ἐν τούτῳ ἀπορῶν καὶ δεδιὼς μὴ βασανιζόμενός τι 
ὁμολογῇ, ὥσπερ νοσὼν δῆθεν τρεῖς ἡμέρας οἴκοι ἄσυτος 
ὧν ἔκειτο, συμφράξαι κελεύσας τὴν θύραν μηδὲ εἰσιέναι 
μηδένα. 


_ Note that ‘the porter,’ being the necessary official, need not be 
expressed. Greeks say, ‘ having ordered to shut the door.’ 


The next sentence is— 


2. But the ephors having got all they could out of the slave, 
found that there were secrets which Phyllidas alone could 
explain : and the question was, how to extract them. 


This is one of those places so common in Greek where the 
real thing which the writer wishes to convey is implied rather 
than actually expressed. The real facts, in the order in 
which they happened, are as follows :—They questioned the 
slave: they did not learn all from him: they thought Phyl- 
lidas knew the rest: they wanted to get it out of him, but 


46 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. ————_‘ [IV 


did not know how to do so, The sentence is quite e; 
we tell these facts in the order in which they occur. It is” 
enough to say, ‘But the ephor having examined the slave, — 
when they found they did not yet know all, wished to learn | 
the rest from Phyllidas, as alone knowing it: but being ep δ 
_ loss,’ etc. om 


3. They could scarcely break open the house and seize Phyllidas 
himself : for violence to an Ambassador would be a mortal — 
affront to the Thebans, and the time for open hostilities 
was not yet. ; on ΤΗΝ 

In this sentence, ‘they could scarcely,’ ete., is again a con- 
cealed Oratio Obliqua: say, ‘they knew they could not, or — 

‘they did not wish to,’ ete. Again, ‘violence . .. mortal — 

affront ’ are abstracts, and must be done as usual by — 

turning: say, ‘if they did violence to . . . the Thebans — 
would be indignant . . .’ ΠΩΣ again, ‘ open hostilities ’ must 
be turned by ‘manifest war’ or some such phrase. es 

The whole sentence (2 and 3) will then be: of δὲ ἔφοροι. 
ἐξελέγξαντες τὸν δοῦλον, ἐπεὶ οὔπω πάντα ἐξεῦρον τὰ ἕτερα 
παρὰ ®, ἐβούλοντο μαθεῖν ὡς μόνου εἰδότος: ἀποροῦντες 
δὲ πῶς χρῆ ἐπιχειρεῖν, ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἤθελον διαρρήξαντι 
τὴν οἰκίαν ξυλλαβεῖν αὐτόν, ὡς τῶν μὲν Θ. χαΛΕΤΩΝΝ : wy 
φερόντων εἰ τόν γε πρεσβεύτην βιάσαιντο αὐτοὶ δὲ ovT 
ἕτοιμοι ὄντες ἐς φανερὸν πόλεμον καταστῆναι, ταῦτα εὖ = 
ἐνθυμούμενοι, ete. 

Note, | at the end of the subordinate clauses, the summarising phrase, e 
ταῦτα οὖν ἐνθυμούμενοι. 


4. The services of the traitor Hyrlas were therefore seals p put “Ὁ 
in requisition. a.» 


There are several noints in this which want attending to. 
‘Services’ abstract: say, ‘use,’ χρῆσθαι. ‘Traitor’: it y 
not do to say προδότης, because this is the first time 
have heard of him, and therefore we must say, who 


Νὰ, 


se 


Iv PHYLLIDAS. 47 


before given information, or some such turn. ‘ Put in requi- 
sition’ goes of course with ‘services’: ‘had to use’ is enough. 

The passage then is: ταῦτα οὖν ἐνθυμούμενοι Tpra τῷ 
πρότερον μηνύσαντι αὖθις διενοοῦντο χρῆσθαι. 


5. The slave had written from prison to warn Phyllidas that no 
confidence could be placed in this emissary : but the letter 
had been intercepted, and Phyllidas, though he had vague 
misgivings, had no reason to suspect actual treachery. 

Here the story goes back to a considerable time before, 
and then comes on to the moment when Hyrlas is wanted. 
It is more natural in Greek to say, ‘Phyllidas, though he 
suspected . . . yet knew nothing certain... for though 
the slave had sent ... yet the ephors.. .’ 

As tothe wording: ‘intercepted’ is merely ‘caught.’ For 
‘confidence be placed,’ say ‘trust.’ ‘Actual treachery ’ is an 
abstract expression, and should be made personal: ‘ did not 
know that he was a traitor.’ 

Then the passage may be done as follows: ὁ δὲ ®. καίπερ 
ἐν ὑποψίᾳ τοῦτον ἔχων, προδιδόντα μέντοι οὔπω σαφῶς 
ἠπίστατο" πέμψαντος γὰρ ἐκ φυλακῆς τοῦ δούλου, ὥστε 
μηκέτι τῷ Ὕρλᾳ πεποιθέναι, ἑαχώθη ὁ ἄγγελος ὑπὸ τῶν 
ἐφόρων. 

Note (1) the phrase ἐν ὑποψίᾳ ἔχειν : 80 ἐν αἰτίᾳ, ἐν ὀργῇ ;—(2) the 
convenient use οὗ ὥστε, giving the practical conclusion of the message. 


Then we have :— 


6. Accordingly, the stages of the farce having been first duly 
arranged, the ephors sent for Hyrlas, examined him, and 
finding him contumacious (as he had been told to be), 
loaded him with irons and threatened him with torture. 

First observe ‘contumacious’: the meaning is simply that 
he refused to tell anything. Next, ‘the stages of the farce,’ 
say, ‘ preparing everything for the deceit, or something of the 
kind. ‘Loaded with irons’ is simply ‘bound’: for ‘ torture’ 
use the verb βασανίζω. 


ag LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE, — ἜΝ IV. 


Then the Greek will be: πάντα οὖν és τὴν amar 
παρασκευασάμενοι μετεπέμψαντο οἱ ἔφοροι τὸν Ὕρλαν ὦ 
ἐλέγξοντες" ἐπεὶ δὲ οὐδὲν δὴ (ὡς εἴρητο) ὡμολόγει vee ες 
 βασανιεῖν ἠπείλουν. 


7. In this seeming extremity he wrote to the Ambassador (tl 
ephors of course allowing the letter to go) and implore 
his aid, particularly inquiring what he might reveal, an 
what he should try to hide even under the severest tortur 
Phyllidas fell into the trap, and sent him a full account 
the plot, showing him what was vital to conceal : and tk 
letter was forthwith taken to the ephors. 


As to structure:—the parenthesis is not quite in i 
natural place, as it is better to say first that the man wrot 
the letter, and what was in it, and then Bos that th 
-ephors allowed the letter to go. 

‘Under the severest torture’ should be done by a part 
ciple. : 

‘Fell into the trap’: avoid metaphors. Say, ‘deceived’ 

The hardest word is ‘vital’ Perhaps it would be enough © 
to say ἀναγκαῖον : but if it is to be fully expressed, we must — 
say, ‘what it 1s necessary to hide, or totally fail,’ or some 
‘such phrase. In Greek perhaps ἢ τοῦ παντὸς σφαλῆναι. 

The last piece will then be: ὁ δὲ ὡς ἔσχατα δῆθεν 
ἀμηχανῶν γράψας ἄλλα τε ἐλιπάρει ἐκεῖνον ὥστε, 
βοηθεῖν, καὶ ἀνάγκην ἔφη εἶναι διδάσκειν τί δεῖ μηνύειν 
καὶ ποῖα χρὴ καίπερ δεινότατα πάσχοντα σιωπᾶν. ὁ δὲ 
®. διιίέντων ὡς εἰκὸς τῶν ἐφόρων τὴν ἐπιστολήν, ἐξαπα- 
τηθεὶς͵ πάντα ἐξεῖπε, δηλώσας ἅμα ἅπερ δέοι ἀποκρύπτειν 
ἢ σφαλῆναι τοῦ πάντος. ταῦτα δὲ εὐθὺς τοῖς ἐφόροις mH 
γέλθη. 


» 


Note (1) ‘seeming’ done with ὡς and δῆθεν, the latter im] 
ing that the appearance was only assumed ;—(2) ὥστε again a 
the word of entreaty, idiomatic, though often as here logically su] 
fluous, 


lly ; ‘barricaded’ will be done passive: which would ᾿ 
cest to a Greek reader that it was done against his will 


1 have the order wrong, and unnecessary pluperfects. 
. ‘In6, ‘the stages of the farce’ will lead to a great many harsh — 
and impossible phrases ; they will translate by the words and 

not by the sense. ‘Loaded with irons,’ again, will lead to ~ 
al surdities. In 7 there will be not many mistakes except 
about words: ‘seeming extremity, ‘severest torture,’ ‘ full 
count,’ ‘plot,’ and ‘ vital,’ will be the chief things. ] 


-- . 


hanging. Whatwas she todo? As usual, she io 


V.—CALAIS. 


1. THE Queen, since her misadventure at the time ¢ of 
the Scotch marriage, had resolved to have no more to i : 
with the insurgents in that quarter. Interference betwee iy 
subjects and sovereign had never been to her tast o: 
2. She had yielded with half a heart to the urgency οὗ 
Cecil, and had gone far enough to commit herself with- 
out having meant even then to go further. The result, 
had been failure, and the alienation of a powerful part Ys τ 
till then her devoted adherents. 3. She was now again πὴ 
confronted with a similar situation, at a time which ν ἢ 
extremely critical. 4. The eight years after which, by ἃ 
the terms of the peace, Calais was to be restored to Eng- 
land, had just expired. She had sent in her demand. 
5. The French replied that the peace had been violated 
by England, in the occupation of Havre, and that 
provisions were no longer binding. 6. The dispute 


to extricate herself by delays and ambiguities. he 
Ambassador’s instructions were out of date before he h ha a 
started. a 


1. The Queen, since her misadventure at the time of the Scot δ 
marriage, had resolved to have no more to do with | 
insurgents in that quarter. Interference between subjects 
and sovereign had never been to her taste. 


In sentence 1, and down to the end of 2, we notice tl at 


the tenses of the principal verbs are all pluperfect : § see 
50 . 


_-*" 


ed 


ae EE Pee ΘΟ ΝΑ 


PES Te Pe eee 


ΕΝ CALAIS. 51 


that it all refers to a previous difficulty to the one which is 
the immediate subject of the piece, namely, the difficulty 
about Calais. In this matter the English is much more 
accurate than the Greek, and in the latter it is not idiomatic 
to use the pluperfect, but the ordinary narrative aorist, the 
time being defined by some word like τότε or πρότερον. 
As to the details, ‘misadventure’ is vague; say, ‘her plans 
about the marriage failed. For ‘Scotch, and ‘in that 
quarter,’ it is enough to use the convenient ‘there.’ In the 
second clause of 1 we notice that the time is again changed, 
and it is even previous to that in the first clause. Again, in 
Greek use the simple past. If the abstracts are properly 
turned, it runs somehow like this: ‘for not even before did 
she like to lead subjects into sedition with their ruler.’ 

The Greek for 1 may then be as follows: Ἢ δὲ ὡς τὰ περὶ 


᾿ \ / “ an r 
TOV γάμον τότε οὐ κατώρθωσεν, τοῖς ἐκεῖ στασιάζουσιν 


Ἵ / 
οὐκέτι ἤθελε ξυμπράσσειν' οὐδεπώποτε yap ἐβούλετο TOUS 
΄ (al / 
πολίτας ἐς στάσιν ἄγειν TH ἀρχούσῃ. 


2. She had yielded with half a heart to the urgency of Cecil, 
and had gone far enough to commit herself without 
having meant even then to go further. The result had 
been failure, and the alienation of a powerful party, till 
then her devoted adherents. 


Here the first clause may be tied on to the preceding: 
‘but she yielded,’ etc. ‘Urgency’ must of course be turned, 
“Cecil urging her’: προθυμουμένου, or πείθοντος : ‘with 
half a heart’ is ‘scarcely, μόλις. ‘And had gone far enough,’ 
etc., is merely the explanation of ‘ yielded,’ and will be most 
neatly done by a consecutive clause, ‘so as to,’ etc. ‘Commit 
herself’ is very idiomatic English, and must be interpreted : 
the meaning is that she had gone so far as to promise, but 
had not even from the first intended to perform; and this is 
easy to give in a variety of ways. The last sentence of 2 is 
a kind of summary of what has gone before, and may be 


_ 3. She was now again confronted with a similar situation, at 


: στᾶσα, καὶ ταῦτ᾽ ἤδη OL ἄλλο τι κινδυνεύουσα, πάδῃ) 


‘difficulty had come again in a time which was, owing to oth 


accounts, she was in great perplexity.’ 


᾿ " ς τ , δ fp 
52 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


tied on to 3 by a participial construction, thus :— accord: 
having failed, and having alienated, etc., ‘she now again, 

ἀλλὰ προθυμουμένου Tod Κ. μόλις ἐπείθετο, ὥστε ? 
i TL Seite ἔργῳ οὐδὲ τότε διανοη σᾶ! ΕΝ ἐν 


etc. 


(1) Notice the common Greek antithesis of λόγῳ and ἔργῳ: 
(2) 2) observe the idiom of τοσούτοις for πολλοῖς or δυνατοῖς. 


time which was extremely critical. 


This clause offers the real difficulty. It implies more than 
it says, for it really expresses in the narrative form, not what Ὁ 
was the case, not what happened, but what she felt to be the 
case: it is again a concealed Oratio Obliqua. She had had — 
experience, and this experience showed her that the same 


things, already critical. It is perhaps best to express t 
fully, and say: ‘when she saw that she had come into 
similar case, and that, too, being already in peril on oth = 


ΕΑΝ 
¢ 1 


The Greek will be: ὡς ἤσθετο αὖθις és ταὐτὸ κατα 


ἀπορίᾳ κατείχετο. 


4, The eight years after which, by the terms of the peace, Cz 
was to be restored to England, had just expired. She h 
sent in her demand. } 


The verbs here are all pluperfects, as at the beginnir 
and are to be treated in the same way. The order must | 
carefully observed; first the terms of the treaty: then the 
time expired: then the demand. [The beginner will fe 


~ 


= oie aihe 
a CALAIS: & 53 


Phe Perish order, and it will be very confused and obscure. | 
_ We shall say: ‘It having been stated in the treaty that after 
ts _ eight years Calais, etc.,. . . since the time was expired . 
she sent in her demand.’ 

_ ΑΒ to the phrasing, for ‘stated’ use the convenient 
τος accusative absolute TEL OP For ‘be restored,’ use the 
eC idiomatic active, ἀποδοῦναι. ‘Sent in her demand’ is (as 
Ε ~ often) vague: say, ‘she demanded to receive it back.’ 

{§ The Greek will then be: εἰρημένον γὰρ δι ὀκτὼ ἐτῶν 
᾿ γχοὺς πολεμίους Νισαίαν ἀποδοῦναι, ὡς ὁ χρόνος ἐτελεύ: 
᾿ τῆσεν, ἠξίου παραλαβεῖν. 


=. Notice §ta ὀκτὼ ἐτῶν, the proper preposition for ‘after an interval of.’ 


᾿ς Neoaiay is used for Calais, being the port of the Megarians, the 
_ jealous neighbours of Athens. 


᾿ς 5, The French replied that the peace had been violated by 
= England, in the occupation of Havre, and that the pro- 
ει" visions were no longer binding. 
In these clauses the agents of course must be made per- 
_ sonal, and instead of ‘ England,’ we must βᾶγ- τοὺς "AyyAous, 
or even ἐκείνην : so again with ‘the occupation’: it must be 
done by a participle. Soin the next clause, ‘and that the 
δ᾿ provisions were no longer binding’ must be also done 
as ee τοἱν, that is to say, ‘so that they were no longer under’ 
et truce, or some such phrase. The word ὑπόσπονδος 
will come in very Borveriently. 
_ The Greek will then be: οἱ δὲ é ἐκείνην ἔφασαν ἀδικῆσαι 
ι Μέγαν ΛΔιμένα καταλαβοῦσαν ὥστε μηκέτι ὑπόσπονδοι 
εἶναι. 


a 


rie 


᾿ς, The dispute was hanging. What was she todo? As usual, 
(386 attempted to extricate herself by delays and ambiguities. 
The Ambassador’s instructions were out of date before he 
had started. 


ο΄ ἴῃ this there are several small difficulties : the first clause, 
_ ‘the dispute was hanging,’ is highly metaphorical, and must, 
ἌΝ ; 
ae 


i a anil iil Eee RAR tg A Re eh Ὁ 
ie a i? 9 A . Ἑ 


ference’: he will only get words like τὸ πολυπραγμονεῖν, 


\ +s * 
. ἘῸΝ 
ie 


δά _ LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE... 


of course, be interpreted. The meaning is that nothings was 
as yet decided on. As to the second clause, ‘What was she 
to do?’ we must observe that it is not idiomatic in Greek, as — 
in Latin, to introduce into the narrative style questions even δ 
inOratio Obliqua. We must say, ‘being at ἃ loss,’ or otherwise _ 
give the sense. Also the two sentences must be joined with » ; 
one another, and with the following clause. For ‘delays and — 
ambiguities’ one may say τριβαί καὶ προφάσεις, and for — 
‘extricate herself’ we must explain what she tried to extri- 
cate herself from. The first part of 6 will then be: ὡς Samm : 
οὐδέν πω ξυνέβη, ἀποροῦσα δὴ ἐς διατριβὰς καὶ ἀρ. is 
σεις ἐτράπετο, ἤν πως TOD πράγματος ἀπαλλαγῇ. The 
greatest difficulty is, however, with what remains, ‘The τῷ 
Ambassador’s instructions were out of date before he had — 
started’ is a very idiomatic and allusive way of saying that τῇ 
before the Ambassador started the Queen had repented of the 
orders which she had given him. In any case the Queen 
must be made the subject of the main verb. If we follow — 
the English, and make the Ambassador the subject, the whole 
thing becomes at once obscured. It is not a bad opportunity . 
for using the well-known Thucydidean expression, ἐς τοῦτο 
περιέστη ὥστε . . ., which conveys to the reader expressly ie 
what the English gives implicitly, that the most striking — a 
proof of the Queen’s vacillation and inscrutability as to her — = 
policy was the fact that the Ambassador’s orders were can- Ἐπ 
celled almost before he had left the country. ‘The rest of 
the English offers no Guiculty, 
We shall then have: καὶ ἐς τοῦτο δὴ περιέστη ὥστε 
“πρὶν καὶ ἀνάγεσθαι τὸν πρεσβεύτην ἅπερ ἐκέλευσεν αὐτὴ Ἢ 
μετεγίγνωσκεν. ἫΝ 
[One word more as to some mistakes which will be likely a 

to be made. In 1 there is not much besides the abstracts ; 
‘misadventure’ and ‘interference.’ It may be worth while — 
to warn the beginner against looking out the word ‘inter- 


as: 


in 


= CALAIS. , Be ee 
me .< ms A ST cI a ἈΡΟΩ 
0 Ὁ something equally useless : whereas the only satisfactory ‘ 
| fi anslation will be got by thinking out the exact meaning in 
this particular place, as given above. In 2 the student 

Ὁ: "should particularly notice the phrase, ‘ go far enough,’ and ‘ go 
4 further’: any translation with anything about going in it will 
altogether be inadmissible, as the ‘ going’ here is purely meta- 

_ phorical. Again, in the word ‘alienated, it is better to 
avoid active words like ἀλλοτριόω : the real fact is that she 
rns something, not that she does anything. In 8 there 

_ will probably be nothing that has not already been handled. 
In4 the temptation will be to make the eight years the sub- 
ΠΝ as it is in the English. This should be avoided. In 
δ, as often, there will be a tendency to use τὸ with the 
_ infinitive instead of a participle: the advantage of the latter 
_is that the narrative is kept personal. Also ‘the provisions 

_ binding’ will be done by making εἰρήνη the subject: again, 
we must have the living subject. In 6 there will be a vast 

_ number of ‘dog’ expressions. ‘Ambiguities’ will be ἀμφί- - 
Roya: ‘instructions’ will be λόγοι: ‘out of date’ will be | 
done by an adjective, éwAds, παλαιός, ἀρχαῖος, and 

- others of varying degrees of impossibility. The true way is 


given, and discussed sufficiently, above. ]. 
iss 


. 


he 


ng τ 


foot so passed over, his horse waded or swam. 4. Thick 


eo) ee Meer? eg eel ee Ὑγ δν 
7 « ΡΒ ν κἂν 7 


tained fugitives, and had given good assistance to the re 


the places consecrate to their cruel rites destroyed. 
whom they took in war, they held it lawful to sacrifi 


» 


VI.—PAULINUS. 


1. At last, over-confident of his present actions, and | 
emulating others, of whose deeds he heard from abroad, — 
he marches up as far as Mona, the isle of Anglesey, a 
populous place. 2, For they, it seems, had both ent 


that withstood him. 3. He makes him boats fitted 
the shallows which he expected in the narrow firth; 


priests, of whom more in another place) with heads 
up to heaven uttering direful prayers, astonished 
Romans; who at so strange a sight stood in amaze, thoug 
wounded; 6. at length ane and encouraged ~ 
their ΕΠ not to car a barbarous and loriabe ΤΟ Ὁ 
fell on, and beat them down scorched and rolling in 
own fire. 7. Then were they yoked with garrisons, 


and by the entrails of men used divination. 8. V 
thus Paulinus had his thought still fixed to go on winni 
his back lay broad open to occasion of losing more behir 
for the Britons, urged and oppressed with many uns 
able injuries, had all banded themselves together | : 


general revolt. 
56 


PAULINUS. 57 


1. At last, over-confident of his present actions, and emulating 
others, of whose deeds he heard from abroad, he marches 
up as far as Mona, the isle of Anglesey, a populous place. 

This sentence looks easier than it is; several points require 
notice if we wish to be idiomatic. ‘His present actions’ 
is abstract, and of course has to be done by turning; but it 
will be a little better to say ‘proud of what he is devising’ 
or ‘intending, than ‘of what he is doing’: it will express 

_ the real fact more accurately. The next clause also requires 

care : if we do it literally, ‘imitating others, of whose deeds,’ 

etc., the Greek sounds harsh. The real sense comprises two 
things, a feeling and a fact: he had heard of the successes of 
others, and he wished to imitate them :. we shall accordingly 
do it best by giving these two things in the right order. 
For ‘deeds’ say ofa ἔδρασαν : for ‘desirous to imitate’ say 


᾿ς μιμεῖσθαι ἐπιθυμῶν, or, perhaps better, ‘not choosing to be 


outdone,’ οὐδ᾽ αὐτὸς ἀξιῶν λείπεσθαι. ‘The isle of Angle- 
sey’ being an explanation of the word ‘Mona,’ it will be 
more in the manner of Thucydides to say in a parenthesis, 
‘and some call it Anglesey.’ 

The whole will then be: τέλος δὲ μεῖζον δὴ φρονῶν ἐφ᾽ 
οἷς νῦν βουλεύει, καὶ ἅμα τοὺς ἄλλοθι πυθόμενος οἷα 
ἔδρασαν οὐδ᾽ αὐτὸς ἀξιῶν λείπεσθαι, μέχρι Μώνης τῆς 
νήσου ἐστράτευσεν πολυανθρώπου οὔσης: καλοῦσι δέ 
τίνες ᾿Αγγλέσειαν. 

Note (1) the phrase (and its order) Μώνης τῆς νήσου ;---(2) the 
inserted participle οὔσης. 


2. For they, it seems, had both entertained fugitives, and had 
given good assistance to the rest that withstood him. 

There is no great difficulty here: we must just remember 
that it is commoner to avoid the pluperfect: for ‘had enter- 
tained,’ ‘had given, it is enough to use the aorist or imper- 
fect. ‘The rest that withstood him’ might be literally οὐ 
ἄλλοι οἱ ἐναντιούμενοι : but it is rather more idiomatic to 
say ‘those who anywhere else withstood him.’ 

: E 


“το Ἄς 
" 
* i= 
‘ 

‘ 


. tinued assisting, while aorist ἐδέξαντο describes better the single 


peas 
Ἂ 


58 _ LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


~The whole will then be: οὗτοι yap φύγαδάς 
ἐδέξαντο, Kal τοῖς ἄλλῃ TH ἐναντιουμένοις ἐβοήθουν. 

Note (1) pee δὴ which here has an English correspon 
phrase ‘it seems’;—(2) imperfect ἐβοήθουν more suitable to the con 


of receiving. 


Paes 
3. He makes him boats Aas to the shallows which he exacted . 


made boats.’ Next, ‘ fitted to the shallows’ might be lit 
ἐπιτήδεια τοῖς βραχέσι, but it is natural and neater i 
Greek to say ὡς πρὸς τὰ βραχέα. Finally, for ‘he 
pected’ it will be enough to say εἰκὸς ἣν or simply εἰκός. 

The sentence will then be: ἀφικόμενος δὲ καὶ mr 


/ ς \ \ - ᾿ 2 3. bs a Pa, 
ποιησάμενος ὡς πρὸς Ta βραχεα (οἷα εἰκὸς ἐν τῷ στενῷ 
ek 


εἶναι) οὕτω δὴ τὸν πεζὸν διεβίβαξε. τῆς δὲ ἵππου τὸ μ ν᾽ 


διὰ τοῦ ὕδατος βάδην ἐχώρει τὸ δὲ νηχόμενον. ays 
Note (1) ἡ ἵππος collective for ‘the cavalry.’ 4 


4. Thick upon the shore stood several gross bands ee men : 
weaponed, many women like furies running to and ft 
dismal habit, with hair loose about their shoul 
torches in their hands. 

No structural difficulty here. We may μά ες re 

Greek pregnant a ‘those from the shore,’ of ἐκ τῆς 


¢ Dismal habit’ is face old-fashioned English for ¢ mour ni i 
or ‘black’: ‘about their shoulders’ may be literal, fase 


We shall then have for the whilen οἱ δὲ ἐκ rh 


: Ν Ἵ 
συχνοὶ ἔστιν ἐ συνέστασαν καὶ ὅπλα ἱκανὰ. Ries 


τρίχας λελυμέναι καὶ ἐσ θῆτω μέλαιναν Φόρου Bes 
ἔχουσαι Tals χερσίν. ς 


a PAULINUS. τὰ 


5. The Druids (those were their priests, of whom more in 
_ __ another place) with heads lift up to heaven uttering dire- 
ο΄ ful prayers, astonished the Romans; who at so strange a 
sight stood in amaze, though wounded ; - 


Ν᾿ 2 


‘This sentence contains an instance of artificial style 
~ common in English: that is to say, it begins about the acts 
_ of the Druids and slides into the acts of the Romans. In 
_ the simpler Greek these two must be kept clearly apart: the 
first clause must contain what the Druids did, and the next 
4 must begin, ‘the Romans astonished,’ etc. Again, the Druids 
not haying been mentioned before, it is more simple and clear 
_ to begin thus: ‘the Drgats: they call them Druids,’ etc. The 
: Ε: is easy. οἱ δὲ ἱερεῖς (Δρυΐδας δὲ Oe, περὶ ὧν 
πλεῖον ἐσαῦθις λεκτέον) ὑπτίας ἄραντες τὰς κεφαλὰς 
᾿ς νὰ ἐπηρῶντο: τοιαύτῃ δὲ τῇ ὄψει ἐκπεπληγμένοι τέως 
᾿ μὲν ἡσύχαζον of Ῥωμαῖοι καίπερ τραυματισθέντες. 


εὐ δ, 


ΠῚ 


᾿ς Note: As they stood for some time, and then, in the next sentence, 
= did something else, it is better in Greek to put in τέως μὲν, to lead up 
" to the ‘at length’ which follows in the next clause. 


ες at length awakened and encouraged by their geueral not to 
fear a barbarous and lunatic rout, fell on, and beat them 
_ + down, scorched and rolling in their own fire. 


Here ‘awakened’ is metaphorical, and we must avoid the 
‘metaphor. ‘Encouraged’ is better not passive, and can easily 
_ be done with the genitive absolute. The tendency of Greek 
is so constantly to keep the active where convenient, since it is” 
_ rather more simple and direct to say, ‘the general encouraged, 
than to turn it the other way, ‘the men were carta by 
the general.’ ‘Rout’ is abstract; and we shall say, ‘men 
| eres and raging.’ : 

_ The Greek will then be: τέλος δὲ παραμυθουμένου τοῦ 
στρατηγοῦ ὅπως μὴ βαρβάρους ἄνδρας καὶ μαινομένους 
φοβήσονται τότε δὴ ἀναθαρσήσαντες. ἐπέθεντο καὶ κατα- 
βαλόντες αὐτοὺς ἐς τὰ ἑαυτῶν πυρὰ κυλινδουμένους τε 
‘A καὶ καιομένους κατεστρέψαντο. 


ie 


2 


Note (1) the idiomatic use of τότε 67, so commonly inserted for — 
clearness as a kind of summary after a number of previous phrases or — 
participles giving the circumstances ; note also (2) the use of ὅπως with 
the future, which, as it is properly used in direct commands,—‘see 
that you do’ so and so,—gives a vivid touch to the indirect narrative. 


60 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


ἔς ΟΝ. 


t ἊΝ 
wert a wy 


I have ended with κατεστρέψαντο, ‘subdued,’ which is 
implied in the English account, and which it is more in 
_accordance with the Greek idiom to express in words. 


7. Then were they yoked with garrisons, and the places conse- — 
crate to their cruel rites destroyed. For whom they took — 
in war, they held it lawful to sacrifice ; and by the entrails 
of men used divination. 


Here again we have an artificiality of structure; for in the — 
English the subject of both clauses is ‘the Britons’; while in — 
reality the actions in the first clause are the actions of the — 
Romans. All we have to do therefore in Greek is to continue 
the same nominative—‘ the Romans ’-—in the first clause, and © 
then change to the Britons. ‘ Yoked’ is an old-fashioned 
word, and simply means here ‘kept under,’ An instructive — 
difficulty arises with the phrase, ‘consecrate to their cruel 
rites’: if we translate it literally it will sound very harsh. 
The truth seems to be this: ‘cruel’ really suggests, in a 
single word, the reason why the Romans destroyed the temples; 
the more simple and child-like Greek style would expressly — 
state it. If we say in Greek, ‘ They destroyed the sanctuaries, 
and stopped them from using any more such rites, we have a 
thoroughly clear and Thucydidean clause, and we have turned 
all the ideas. 3 

The Greek will then be: ἐνταῦθα δὴ τοὺς μὲν φρουρίοις, 
κατεῖχον, τὰ δὲ ἱερὰ καθελόντες ἔ ἔπαυσαν μηκέτι τοιούτοις 
χρῆσθαι σφαγίοις" νόμιμον γὰρ οὗτοι @ovTO ods “πολέμῳ ς 
ἕλοιεν θῦσαι, σπλάγχνοις τε ἀνθρωπίνοις ἐ ἐμαντεύοντο. 

Note (1) the convenient and idiomatic use οὗ τοιοῦτος for ‘cruel.’ 


This word will very frequently do for strong adjectives, especially . 
adjectives which express a judgment on something that is being 


PAULINUS. 61 


related, and where the particular character of the adjective is easily 
inferred from the context ;—(2) the indefinite optative for ‘took’: 


a general statement;—(3) the regular μηκέτι after the hindering or 


 quasi-negative word παύω. 


8, While thus Paulinus had his thought still fixed to go on win- 
ning, his back lay broad open to occasion of losing more 
behind ; for the Britons, urged and oppressed with many — 
unsufferable injuries, had all banded themselves together to 
a general revolt. 


First, Paulinus, the person, must be subject all through, 
We must say, ‘ie was in danger of losing,’ not ‘ his back, 


_ Again, ‘ go on winning’ is a little vague, and in good Greek 


would be rather more precisely expressed : ‘to advance still 
more, ‘to over-run the further countries,’ or something of 
that sort, In the last clause the verb will be once more, 
naturally, not pluperfect but aorist ; and the word ‘ unsuffer- 
_ able,’ which might be done literally, οὐκ ἀνεκτός, will be 
still more neatly put into a participle, ‘suffering and no 
longer able to put up with it,’ πάσχοντες καὶ οὐκέτι 
ἀνεχόμενοι. Lastly, ‘to a general revolt’ will be best by 
the construction ‘so that,’ ὥστε, which is so much commoner 
in Greek than in English, and is used to express so many 
different connections. 

The whole end will then be: ὁ δὲ Παυλῖνος, οὕτω τὰ 
ἔτι πορρωτέρω διανοούμενος καταδραμεῖν, τὰ ὄπισθεν 
 ἐκινδύνευέ τι σφαλῆναι" οἱ γὰρ βάρβαροι δεινότατα πάλαι 
πάσχοντες καὶ οὐκέτι ἀνεχόμενοι κοινῇ ἤδη γνώμῃ ξυνώ- 
μοσαν ὥστε ἀποστῆναι. 


Note (1) the euphemism τὸ σφαλῆναι for ‘losing more behind’: bad 
_ things are often euphemistically lightened in Greek, and captains and 


generals are often dreading ri παθεῖν or σφαλῆναί τι, rather than 


‘disaster’ or ‘defeat’ or ‘death’ ;—(2) the tense πάσχοντες with 
πάλαι: the present expresses in the participle simple continuance, not 
_ the time at all: the time is given by πάλαι ;—(3) ἤδη makes it quite 
clear that the conspiracy was prior to Paulinus’s present plans, 


VITI.— CLEVELAND. 


1. Tue effect of all this providence was not suck 

was reasonably to be expected. 2, The night grew α da 

π΄ and misty as the enemy could wish; and about three i 
the morning the whole body of the horse passed wit 
4 ereat silonee between the armies, and within pistol-sh 
of the cottage, without so much as one musket discha1 Ὁ; 

αὖ them. 3, At the break of day, the horse were 
covered marching over the heath, beyond the reach o 

foot; and there was only at hand the Earl of Clevel 
evade, the body of the king’s horse being at a greate 

- . tance. 4, That brigade, to ith some other troops v 
had taken the Adis joined, followed them in the 
and killed some, and took more prisoners: but stron: 

parties of the enemy frequently turning upon them 

the whole body often making a stan they were of 

᾿ - compelled to retire; yet followed in that manner, t 
‘they killed and took about a hundred; which wa 8. 
ς΄] greatest damage they sustained in iets whole ma: 
5. The notice and orders came to Goring when he w 

one of his jovial exercises ; which he received with ἢ 


ἘΝ the enemy’s horse were passed through his quarte 
did then pursue them in any time. 
ee 62 


ΝΥ es 


ὃ πο. εὐ CLEVELAND. 63 


Ὦ The effect οἵ all this providence was not such as was reason- 
τ΄ ably to be expected. 


_ A thoroughly abstract sentence of the most characteristic 
_ English sort. The real personal meaning is quite hidden 
- away. Recasting it into the personal form it becomes some- 
Pcs of this sort: ‘Although they had made such careful 
ern, the matter did not turn out according to their 
expectations.’ 

4 % There is then no further difficulty, and the Greek is as 
_ follows: τοῖς δέ, καίπερ τοσαύτῃ εὐλαβείᾳ TapacKevaca- 
fe a TO πρᾶγμα, οὐ μέντοι κατ᾽ ἐλπίδα ἀπέβη. 

ΡΛ 

2, The night grew dark and misty as the enemy could wish ; 
and about three in the morning the whole body of the 
"δ horse passed with great silence between the armies, and 
ἫΝ within pistol-shot of the cottage, without so much as one 
a musket discharged at them. 


ie 


‘As the enemy could wish’ is a phrase that requires care : 
it might be done literally, ὥσπερ ἂν ἐβούλοντο, or ὡς 
βουλομένοις ἃ ἂν ἦν, but it would sound a little artificial in 
_ Greek: perhaps the best way is once more to be severely 

z _ business-like, and say something of this sort:—‘The night 
_ was very favourable to the enemy, being dark,’ etc.: or even 
simpler, ‘To the enemy the night by good luck was dark,’ 
ete. ‘By good luck’ is idiomatically turned by θείᾳ τινὶ 
᾿ τύχη : for ‘misty’ we may say ‘ with mists,’ and then the 
_ Greek will be: τοῖς yap πολεμίοις θείᾳ δὴ τύχῃ σκοτεινῆς 
 ψενομένης μετὰ νεφελῶν τῆς νυκτός... 

In the rest of the sentence the greatest catch lies in the 
last words, ‘without so much as one musket discharged at 
- them’: for here we have, as so often happens in English, a 
 fact—namely, that the enemy did not fire at them—related 
~ not directly but indirectly. In Greek we must be direct, 
and say ‘they did not even fire one shot at them.’ The 
_ order also can be improved for the sake of clearness: as 


fav) 
F, τ Ψ 
ἀν--.. 


a 


64 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


thus—‘ those in the cottage not firing, etc., although they ‘ 
passed close,’ etc. As to the phrasing: ‘about three in the ~ 
morning’ will be ‘a little before dawn’: ‘ within pistol- shot? : 
might be the idiomatic ἐντὸς τοξεύματος, or, more simply, — 
‘ata short distance,’ dv’ ὀλίγου, διὰ βραχέος : ‘musket’ will sf 
be βέλος or τόξευμα. | a 
The whole clause is then: ὀλίγον πρὸ ἡμέρας ἡ ἵππος Ἢ 
πολλῇ σιγῇ μεταξὺ τῶν στρατοπέδων διεχώρει, ἅμα οὐδὲ 
ὃν βέλος ἀφιέντων ἐπ᾽ αὐτοὺς τῶν ἐκ τῆς κώμης καίει 
διὰ βραχυτάτου παριόντας. 


Note the phrases πολλῇ σιγῇ : στρατόπεδον for an ‘army’ when 
resting in its position: and the pregnant τῶν ἐκ τῆς κώμης. 


΄ 
wee 
’ 


3. At the break of day, the horse were discovered marching | 
over the heath beyond the reach of the foot; and there 
was only at hand the Earl of Cleveland’s brigade, the hott 
of the king’s horse being at a greater distance. 2 


As to structure: these two clauses are both so simple and — q 
concrete that we might do them literally, and say for “ dis- ; 
covered ’ δῆλος or φανερὸς, and for ‘ was at hand’ παρῆσαν, 
or, better, ὑπῆρχον. But in truth, as so often happens, the | 
connection of thought is really personal, and the πους ᾿ 
thoughts conveyed are these: ‘they saw the horse, ete. . . a 
and their foot could not reach them ... and they had no 
cavalry to catch them with, except,’ etc. Whichever method — 
we choose of doing the sentence, there is no doubt we must — 
make far clearer than the English does (in the last clause) 
that there is an antithesis between the jfoot which could not 
reach them, and the cavalry of which (for reasons given) ἜΝ Ἢ 
had none, except only the brigade mentioned. 

As to the phrasing :—‘ At break of day’ is ἅμα ἕῳ, or 
περὶ δὲ τὴν ἕω : ‘beyond the reach of’ is simplest ‘so that’ Ὁ 
they could not reach’: for the ‘ Karl’s brigade’* we may use : 
the common οἱ περὶ τόν . . y 's ‘ : 

We shall then have: (1) περὶ δὲ τὴν ἕω δῆλος ἣν ἡ 


oe 5 
Lae, 


4) 3 


CLEVELAND. 65 


ἵππος διὰ πεδίου ἤδη προχωροῦσα ὥστε μηδὲ ἐφικέσθαι 
τὸν πεζόν" οὐδὲ ἱππεῖς ὑπῆρχον εἰ μὴ οἱ περὶ τὸν Κλῆφον, 
διὰ πλείονος ἀπόντων τῶν πολλῶν : oF, if we do it the 
more personal way, (2) ἅμα δὲ ἕῳ εἶδον τὴν ἐκείνων ἵππον, 
διὰ πεδίου ἤδη προχωροῦσαν, etc. . . . ἱππέας γὰρ αὐτοὶ 
οὐκ εἶχον εἰ μὴ τοὺς περὶ, etc. ' 

Note in (2) the elliptic yap: ‘the foot could not follow: [I don’t 
say cavalry] for they had none,’ etc. 


“Sey = ΤΥ ΨΥ ΡΟ 


That brigade, to which some other troops which had taken 
the alarm joined, followed them in the rear; and killed 
some, and took more prisoners: but stronger parties of the 
enemy frequently turning upon them, and the whole body 
often making a stand, they were often compelled to retire ; 
yet followed in that manner, that they killed and took 
about a hundred ; which was the greatest damage they sus- 
tained in their whole march. 


————— hee  ΎΥς- 
. 


The style here is eminently Thucydidean, the clauses 
being connected in the most primitive and simple manner, 
without any attempt at working up or artificial linking, and 
simply aiming at a brief and clear narrative The only 
structural changes I should suggest are to say ‘following 
killed’ for ‘followed and killed’; and, further, to connect 
‘compelled’ and ‘ followed,’ which are directly antithetic, by 
μέν and δέ. Neither is there much difficulty in the phrasing : 
‘stronger parties of the enemy’ will perhaps lead the be- 
ginner into clumsinesses: we had better say ‘ the enemy with 
strong force. ‘The greatest damage,’ in the last line, may 
be done verbatim: but it is worth while to note that the 
Greeks often use the negative in such a case: they say simply 
‘suffered nothing worse, οὐδὲν κάκιον. 

Sentence 4 will then run as follows in Greek: οὗτοι 
οὖν μετ᾽ ἄλλων τινῶν οἱ δείσαντες προσεχώρησαν ἐκείνους 
διώκοντες τοὺς μὲν ἀπέκτειναν πλείους δὲ εἷλον" τῶν δὲ 
πολεμίων πολλάκις ἰσχυρᾷ δυνάμει ἐπιστρεφόντων, ἔστιν 
δ᾽ ὅτε συμπάντων ἀντιτασσομένων, τότε μὲν ἠνωγκάζοντο 


a line il 


Ot 


“Ὁ ΠΥ το es vee, 
» ff 


>\ e€ ; A e \ eo 25/ Ψ τῆς ¢ 
Εν UTTOVNO@PEW, VOTEPOV δὲ ομῶὼς “πῶς E€EOLMWKOV, WOTE Ε 


5, The notice and orders came to Goring when he was in one o 


ourselves is, What is the first act that Goring does here? 


‘messenger.’ . ‘ Orders,’ again, is a little too allusive: a Greek © 
would say most likely what the orders were, especially as we 


_ quite briefly and clearly if we say ‘he chanced to be 81] 


/ } ἐδ 

μάλιστα ἐγένοντο οἱ ἁλόντες τε καὶ ἀποθανόντες" 
pa! nN 

ἄλλο κάκιον οὐδὲν ἔπαθον ἐν TH ὁδῷ. 


Notice the phrases προσχωρεῖν, ‘to join’; ἔστιν ὅτε, ‘at times’; — 
ἐγένοντο, ‘amounted to.’ 


of 
his jovial exercises; which he received with mirth, and id 
slighting those who sent them, as men who took alarms wey 


warmly ; and he continued his delights till all the oat 
horse were passed through his quarters ; nor did then pur 
sue them in any time. 7 oe 


i: 


The first thing to observe is, that the real πε. of all. : 
this is Goring. Accordingly, we have to arrange the sentence 
round Goring as a centre; and the question we have to as sk 


that is the verb to make the principal verb: it is οὐνί μα τα - 
‘he received with mirth.’ The general structure will ther an 
be: ‘Goring, when the message, etc., came, since he was” 
making merry . . . slighted and ridiculed them; nor oe Bes 5 
cease,’ etc. - = 


In the phrasing: the abstract ‘notice’ may be the concre 


have nowhere heard, in so many words, what they sh ; 
about, and have to infer that he received an order fo pursue, 
‘One of his jovial exercises is very vernacular: it implies — 
two things, viz., that he was enjoying himself, and that he 

was in the habit of enjoying himself. It will all be do 


ing himself as usual.’ ‘Mirth’ and ‘slighting’ may — 
καταγελᾶν, καταφρονεῖν, ὀλιγωρεῖν. The last clause 
again rather a catch for the unwary; it also implies t 
things: first, that he did at last pursue, and that when he 
did pursue he was ‘too late, We must make both clear, ε 


+ aa.) 
pty \- Γ νυ - 
[λον Ὁ 
: 


nce 5 will aot tun: ὁ δὲ Τωρύων, ἀγγέλου περὶ a 
ἥκοντος ὡς βοηθεῖν δεῖ, ἐπεὶ εὐφραινόμενος ἐ ἔτυχε 
εἰωθός, καταγελῶν δὴ ὠλιγώρει τῶν πεμψάντων, 
ἄσσον δεδιότων". οὐδὲ ἡδόμενος [or τῆς. εὐωχίας, or 
παιδιᾶς ἐπαύσατο πρὶν οἱ ἐκείνων ἱππεῖς πάντες 
ῆλθον: ὥστε τέλος διώκων οὐκέτι δὴ κατέλαβεν. 


πρὶν with the indicative, regularly after negatives when both se) 
are narrative. Note also the dramatic particles. ; oe 


VIII.—CHARLES. 


1. Tue next day, in the afternoon, the king, attended — 


only by his own guard, and some few gentlemen who put 
themselves into their company in the way, came to the 
house of commons; and commanding all his attendants 
to wait at the door, and to give offence to no man, him- 


self, with his nephew, the prince elector, went into the 


house, to the great amazement of all. 2. The speaker 
leaving the chair, the king went into it; and told the 
house, ‘he was sorry for that occasion of coming to them ; 
that yesterday he had sent a sergeant-at-arms to appre- 


hend some that, by his command, were accused of high 


treason; whereunto he expected obedience, but instead 
thereof he had received a message. 3. He declared to 


them, that no king of England had been ever, or should 


be, more careful to maintain their privileges, than he 
would be; but that in cases of treason no man had privi- 
lege; and therefore he came to see if any of those persons 
whom he had accused were there. 4. For he was resolved 


to have them, wheresoever he should find them.’ Then — 
looking about, and asking the speaker whether they were - 
in the house, and he making no answer, he said, ‘he per- 
ceived the birds were all flown, but expected they should — 


be sent to him as soon as they returned thither; and 
assured them in the word of a king, that he never intended 
any force, but would proceed against them in a fair and 
legal way :’ and so returned to Whitehall. 

68 


$ 


rum » ‘ 4 
δου ee ἃ 


ah ὰ “ ‘ 
ES ae 
Se ee”) eee ee 


VIII.) CHARLES. 69 


| 1. The next day in the afternoon, the king, attended only by 
his own guard, and some few gentlemen who put them- 
selves into their company in the way, came to the house 
of commons; and commanding all his attendants to wait 
at the door, and to give offence to no man, himself, with 
his nephew, the prince elector, went into the house, to the 
great amazement of them all. 
The main structure is absolutely simple, and offers no 
difficulty, except the very last clause: for, as the last action 
is ‘went into the house,’ the ‘amazement’ really describes 
not what the king did, but what the effect of his action was on 
the others. It is better, therefore, to reserve this for the 
next sentence. ‘Attended’ will be active, genitive absolute, 
‘the guard attending.’ The ‘house of commons’ is ἐκκλησία. 
‘Give offence’ is λυπεῖν, or [μηδὲν] ἀηδὲς, or λυπηρὸν 
δρᾶσαι. ‘The prince elector’ is merely a title, and of 
course has nothing at all corresponding to it in Greek: it is 
a matter of taste whether we insert some Greek word sug- 
gesting a foreign title, like σατράπας, or whether we omit 
it altogether: as the passage is written for the sake of style, 
and not for the instruction of Greek readers, I should prefer 
to omit it. In any case it is a minor question. 
τῇ δὲ ὑστεραίᾳ μετὰ μεσημβρίαν ὁ βασιλεύς, οὐδενὸς 
ἐπομένου πλὴν τῶν φυλάκων ἢ εἴ τις ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ συνεγένετο, 
ἐς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν ἦλθεν: εἰπὼν δὲ πᾶσι τοῖς περὶ ἑαυτὸν 
ἔξω περιμεῖναι, μηδὲ ἀηδὲς μηδὲν δρᾶν μηδενί, αὐτὸς μετὰ 
τοῦ υἱδοῦς ἐσήει: πάντων δὲ θαυμαζόντων, etc. 
Note the common idiom εἴ τις ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ, etc., for ‘some few who 
met,’ etc. Also the repeated negatives, μηδὲ. .. μηδὲν. .. μηδενί. 


2. The speaker leaving the chair, the king went into it; and 
told the house, ‘he was sorry for that occasion of coming 
to them; that yesterday he had sent a sergeant-at-arms to 
apprehend some that, by his command, were accused of 
high treason ; whereunto he had expected obedience, but 
instead thereof he had received a message.’ 


The king is obviously the main subject all through this 


ade) nie See 
Yo SN Sree 


clauses, where the sneer Sateen in the antithesis πὶ ( 
the words ‘expected obedience’ and ‘received a message’ 
must be rather more clearly brought out in the Greek. — 
will be enough if we say ‘So far from obeying, they ha 
ventured to reply.’ Another slight difficulty isin the phrase 
‘sorry for that occasion of coming to them’: if we transl: 
it literally, we somehow lose the force: the reason is t 
the king means mildly to rebuke them, by saying that he ¢ 
not want to come to them, but he was forced ; and this must — 
be brought out. ‘The chair’ may be the ‘ platforms βῆμα ᾿ 
‘Sergeant-at-arms’ may be ὑπηρέτης. ‘High treason’ is 
perhaps ἐπιβουλεύειν. In the rest there is nothing to tons 
us. . me 
The whole will then be: ἐπεὶ ὁ ἐπιστάτης napeetenn € 


cf a) > 3.5 5 / be 2 5) \ lal \ : 3 

οὕτω παρελθεῖν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀνάγκην εἶναι, ἐπεὶ τῇ μὲν προτερα 
“a a n 

ἄγγέλον ἔπεμψεν ὥστε τῶν ἐκεῖθέν τινας ξυλλαβεῖν, 


αὐτὸς ὡς ἐπιβουλεύοντας ἡ ἠτιῶτο" τοὺς δὲ οὐχ ὅτι πιθέσθαι δ 


ὥστερ ἠξίου, GANG καὶ ἀντειπεῖν τι τολμῆσα. © 


Note (1) the technical word ἐπιστάτης, president of the ἐκκλησία; τς 
(2) the order of οὐκ ἂν ἔφη βούλεσθαι ἘΞ 19) the phrase οὐχ ὅτι: 


‘so far from’ ;—(4) the tenses of the words ἠτιᾶτο, ἠξίου. as 


3. ‘He declared to them, that no king of -—England had beet 
ever, or should be, more careful to maintain their privile 
than he would be ; but that in cases of treason no man had 
privileges ; and therefore he came to see if any of thos 
persons whom he had accused were there.’ 


The clearness of this sentence is much improved if we put 
the important word ‘privileges’ well to the front : ‘as to 
privileges, no man,’ etc. The abstract ‘in cases of tree 
must of course be made personal, ‘to persons plotting,’ 


at of the points only concern wording and arrangement, and 
The Greek will be ΤΕΣ of this sort: καὶ γὰρ ὅσα 
μὲν γέρα ἔχουσιν, οὐδένα ἑαυτοῦ οὔτε τῶν πρότερον 
βασιλέων ἐπιμελέστερον φυλάσσειν, οὔτε τῶν ἔπειτα 
᾿ μέλλειν. ἐπιβουλεύουσι δὲ οὐδὲν ὑ ὑπάρχειν τοιοῦτον. ὥστε 
: ᾿ ξητήσων ἥ ἥκειν οἷς ἐνεκάλει εἴ τις πάρεστιν. 

τὰ _ Note the convenient τοιοῦτον, to save repetition. 


= 


Ks Ἶ 
_ 4. ‘For he was resolved to have them, wherever he should 
find them.’ Then looking about, and asking the speaker 
whether they were in the house, and he making no answer, 
he said, ‘ he perceived'the birds were all flown, but expected 
__. they should be sent to him as soon as they returned thither; 


ἣν 
a ὃ ὑὸν 
ἜΣ 
a py » 


ould 


tended any force, but would proceed against them in a fair 
and legal manner;’ and so returned to Whitehall. 


: a In the first clause it is a little more idiomatic to put the rela- 


isthe case. In the next sentence, the proverbial phrase, ‘ the 
birds flown,’ must of course be done simply, ‘all gone’ ‘ Ex- 
_ pected they should be sent’ is a good example of one of those 
minor differences of idiom which make such an important 
- difference to the goodness or badness of composition. The 


rally use the passive construction: ‘bade the OuES be pulled 
down,’ ‘ordered the gold to be taken away’; or, as here, 
᾿ fexpected the men to be sent’: in Greek, the construction 
is nearly always active: the servant or official who does the 
actual deed, being unimportant, is omitted in both languages 
but the Greeks say, ‘bade pull down the house’: ‘ ordered 
to take away the gold’: ‘expected to send to hin! ‘On 
the word of a king,’ being an idiom, turn it any convenient 
4 way : ‘with a royal oath,’ ‘as being a king,’ or, better, ‘if a 
king was to be believed,’ which gives the meaning most fully 
-andclearly. ‘Any force’ will be adjective, βίαιον ; ‘fair and 


and assured them in the word of a king, that he never in- 


point is this: in English, after a verb of ordering, we gene- 


__ tive section, ‘wherever he should find them,’ first, as so often — 


“αι 


72 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. — [VIII. 


legal way’ will be naturally adverbs. T.astly, ‘Whitehall’ - 
may be simply ‘homewards, οἴκαδε. 

The whole will then be: ὅπου yap ἂν εὕρῃ ξυλλαβεῖν 
βεβουλεῦσθαι. ταῦτα δὲ εἰπὼν καὶ ἅμα περιβλέψας TOV 
ἐπιστάτην ἐπήρετο εἰ πάρεισιν: σιωπῶντος δὲ τούτου 
ἠσθῆσθαι ἔφη πάντας οἰχομένους, ἀξιοῦν δὲ ἐπειδὰν 
ἥκωσι πρὸς ἑαυτὸν πέμψαι: ἀπομνύναν γάρ, εἰ βασιλεῖ 
δεῖ πιστεύειν, μηδὲν βίαιον μηδέποτε βουλεῦσαι, ἀλλὰ 
πάντα ἐννόμως καὶ δικαίως πράξειν. τοσαῦτα δὲ λέξας 
οἴκαδε ἀπῆλθεν. 


Note ἀπομνύναι, ‘to swear a negative.’ 


IX,—DANETIOS. 


__1, Daneios, finding that his majesty was much depressed 
h by the results of the engagement, and fancying he was 
τς quiet preparations for a stealthy departure, re- 

flected on the fatal consequences to himself, as the adviser 

_ of the war, if they returned after such a failure. 2. After 

~ much deliberation, the best course appeared at last to be, 

_as often happens, the most enterprising. 3, Accordingly 

he repaired to the king, and after earnestly imploring 

him to moderate his excessive grief, and not to despair of 

finding some solution of their aificulites he reminded him 

that ὩΝΕΝ they had before had serious reverses, they had 
a never been ultimately disappointed of their aims. 4. It 
_ was not, he said, a matter for such deep dejection, that 
they had suffered the loss of a few timbers. There was 
~ abundant forest close to the shore, to build another fleet 
double the first, if need be. 5. Moreover the hill tribes, _ 
who had before repudiated their rule, had suffered for 
_ their rebellion, just as the present victorious rebels would 
; ~ doubtless one day rue their audacity. 6. His majesty 
could take his choice. If he preferred to remain, there 
_ was no need of fear: if 1t seemed safer to return, and leave 
him, Daneios, to finish the work the king had begun, there _ 
was no obstacle to such a course. '7. The Phthiotes could 
not escape the impending penalty of disobedience: it must 
end in submission to a harder yoke than ever. Failure 
had now taught caution: and caution would insure 
_ victory, | . 


a 


F 
Ὧ 


αν 


» ¢ 


ἜΝ 


. 


74 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


be expressed in the simpler Greek. It will be enough t to. 
_ say ‘defeat.’ ‘Preparations’ and ‘departure’ are abstracts 
easily turned. ‘The fatal consequences to himself, rather | 


© Adviser’ is best as a participle. 


making quiet preparations for a stealthy departure, reflected — 
on the fatal consequences to himself; as the adviser of the τ 
war, if they returned after such a failure. 


Nothing to alter in the general build of the ΒΟ ΡΟΣ ; 
both the order and the directness of the narrative are quit 
Greek. In the phrasing, on the other hand, there are sever 
points. ‘His majesty’ is, of course, ‘the king’ “ The Tera :: 


ficial expression that is commoner than is sometimes supposed. — 
The writer means, of course, the bad results: and this mus δ 


pompous for Greek: say merely ‘what he shall suffer. 


Cas whole will bees ὁ δὲ ues γνοὺς τὸν βασιλέα. τῇ 7 


αὐτὸς πείσεται ὡς πολεμεῖν κελεύσας ἢν τοσοῦτο on 
ἐντες κατέλθωσιν. 


(2) dramatic particles ἄρα and δή ;—(3) κελεύω of the adviser, not ne 
sarily of the one in authority ;—(4) κατελθεῖν, idiomatic of going he me 
by sea: as is evidently the case, from the mention below of chee is 
κι 

2, After much deliberation, the best course appeared at last ὁ 
be, as often happens, the most enterprising. 


The sentence will be personal, I need hardly say ; bu : 
real difficulty is in the words ‘the most enterprising.’ 
English is rather abstract and allusive: he does not tell 1 
what the enterprise was. We must either interpret ‘it, δὴ 
say ‘once more to risk a battle,’ or, if this seems to ad 
rather too much to the original, as indeed it pethans a 


DANEIOS. 78 


: pt ther vaguely, ‘to try the bolder course.’ 
eg πολλὰ οὖν Ῥουλευσάμενος. ἄριστον ᾧετο εἶναι (ὡς πολ- 
λάκις δή γίγνεται) ἐς τὸ τολμηρότερον τραπέσθαι. 


a - Note δή, in a reference to general truths; also the convenient 
Bien: 
δῆ, τραπέσθαι. 


᾿ 


8 Accordingly he repaired to the king, and after earnestly 
= - imploring him to moderate his excessive grief, and not tu | 
despair of finding some solution of their difficulties, he 
reminded him that though they had before had serious 
reverses, they had never been ultimately disappointed of 
ε΄. their alms. 

ἥν ΤᾺ the style is a little verbose and abstract, but the 
| order and the thoughts are substantially plain and natural in 
? Greek: the piece wants very little recasting. ‘ Moderating his 
% _ excessive grief’ is merely ‘not to grieve too much.’ ‘Not 
- to despair, etc., is rather a lengthy and ΡΟΣ expression: but 
᾿ς by the use of the phrase ἀνέλπιστος Basu we can shorten 
and simplify a good deal; so again, ‘never been ultimately 
disappointed ’ can be put more briefly, ‘always at last gained.’ 
_ ‘Aims’ is best done by a relative: ‘what ἽΠΕΥ aimed at,’ 

x ~The Greek will then be: ἐλθὼν τοίνυν πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα 
ἠξίου μὴ λίαν δυσχεραίνειν ὡς οὔπω ἐς ἀνέλπιστον 
| ἀπορίαν καταστάντα' πολλὰ γὰρ ἤδη ἡσσηθέντες ἀεὶ 
en ντες ὧν ἐφίεντο τυχεῖν. 


Note (1) the convenient word καταστάς, used of getting into any 
4 station, place, condition, state, etc.;—(2) the nominative with infini- 


‘tive, of the subject, ἡσσηθέντες . . . τυχεῖν. 
“ 


Fons 


4, Tt was not, he said, a matter for such deep dejection, that 
___ they had suffered the loss of a few timbers. There was 
τ΄ abundant forest close to the shore, to build another fleet 
double the first, if need be. 

Ke. ‘That they had suffered’: use the regular Greek idiom after 
“nouns or verbs of emotion—like ‘deep dejection’—to put 
‘if? not ‘that. ‘There was no need to despair if...’ As 


ee Ρ 


76 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


to the next clause, it may be treated as in the English: but — 
Ihave thought it rather more convenient to tack it on tothe 
other, as it gives the reason why there was no need to be Ἢ 
dejected. In phrasing, use for ‘dejection ’ words for ‘hope- — 
less’ or ‘ dispirited, δύσελπις, ἀθυμεῖν, ἐλπίδα ἀποβαλεῖν. 
‘Timbers, ξύλα, often contemptuously applied to ships: 
‘shore’ may be αἰγιαλός, but is usually either ‘sea,’ θάλασσα,, 
or, ‘land,’ γῆ, according as we are speaking from the point of 
view of the land or sea respectively. ‘Double the first’ may 
be literal, διπλάσια τῶν προτέρων, or it may be still 
simpler, dls τοσαῦτα. 

The sentence will then be: οὐδὲ ἐλπίδα δεῖν ἀποβαλεῖν 
εἰ ξύλα τινὰ διέφθαρται, ὡς ἀφθόνου ὕλης Tapa τῇ 
θαλάσσῃ ὑπαρχούσης, ἢν καὶ δὶς τοσαύτας ναῦς δέῃ 
ποιεῖσθαι. 

Note middle ποιεῖσθαι of making ships. 


5. Moreover the hill tribes, who had before repudiated their rule, — 
had suffered for their rebellion, just as the present victorious 4 
rebels would doubtless one day rue their audacity. 3 

= 
4 
é 


The arrangement of the thoughts is here very artificial in 
the English: the case to be proved is that of the present “a 
rebels, and the comparison adduced to prove it is that of the — 
hill tribes: but in the English it looks at first sight as if it” 
were the other way up. In doing it into Greek we must — 
revert to the natural order, and say, ‘ as the hill tribes had, 
etc., ‘so the present rebels,’ etc. ‘ Repudiated their rule’ isa — 
phrase which belongs to the style of all this passage, and is 
merely a rather verbose equivalent of ‘rebel,’ to save 
repetition: but the more business-like Greek is not afraid of | 
repetition, when it is wanted for the sense, — ᾿ 

There is no further difficulty, and the Greek will be: καὶ a 
ὥσπερ οἱ ἐκ τῶν ὀρῶν πρότερον ἀποστάντες δίκην ἤδη 5 
ἔδοσαν, οὕτω Kal τοὺς νῦν ἀφεστῶτας καὶ κρατοῦντας ὮΝ is 
τόλμαν ἔτι μεταγνώσεσθαι. Ἶ 


DANEIOS. 77 


ΠΡ, His majesty could take his choice. If he preferred to 
--—s remain, there was no need of fear: if it seemed safer to 
return, and leave him, Daneios, to finish the work the king 
had begun, there was no obstacle to such a course. 

This passage also might doubtless be done literally: but 
it seems to me a little better to make it all up into 
one sentence, and say: ‘The king might choose . . . since, 
’ τῷ he thought fit to... there was no danger... . if he 
preferred . . . nothing would hinder’ The only difficulty 
ig to arrange the words so as to avoid the need for too many 
__ pronouns; and a little care will do that. 

Α The Greek will be: ἑλέσθαι οὖν ἐξεῖναι, ὡς ἐὰν μὲν δοκῇ 
μένοντα ἐπιχειρῆσαι, οὐδὲν δέον φοβεῖσθαι, εἰ δὲ ἀσφαλείας 
ἕνεκα κατελθὼν βούλοιτο ἑαυτῷ ἐπιτρέπειν τὸ πρᾶγμα 
ὥστε ἀντὶ ἐκείνου ἐκτελέσαι, οὐδὲν ἐμποδὼν ἐσόμενον. 
Observe the accusative absolute, with the neuter and impersonal 
words δέον and ἐσόμενον. 


_ 7. The Phthiotes could not escape the impending penalty of 
disobedience : it must end in submission to a harder yoke 
thanever. Failure had taught caution: and caution would 
insure victory. 

‘Disobedience,’ ‘submission, ‘yoke’ must all be made 
_ personal: there will then be no difficulty in the first half of 
_ the sentence. The epigram with which the piece concludes 
is not hard if we interpret it, perhaps somewhat as follows: 
Ἂ - owing to their failure, they would be more cautious, so as. 
to more certainly conquer.’ 

We shall then have finally: οὐ yap φευξεῖσθαι τοὺς 
ΟΦ θιῶτας μὴ οὐ δίκην δοῦναι ὧν ἠπείθουν, ἀλλὰ ὑπο- 
᾿ χειρίους γενομένους ἔτι δεινότερα πείσεσθαι τῶν πρότερον. 
αὐτοὶ γὰρ διὰ τὴν ἧσσαν εὐλαβέστερον ἂν ἐπεχειρῆσαι 
ὥστε σαφέστατα δὴ νικήσειν. 

__ Note (1) μὴ οὐ epexegetic, after privative word φευξεῖσθαι when 

_ further negatived with ov;—(2) νικήσειν infinitive of Oratio Obliqua, not 
due to ὥστε. If it had been due to ὥστε it would not have been future. 


Ran 


the conspirators, who, fearing all was about to Ὁ 


; X —HEXETER. 


1. Conspiracies against Henry usually met with — 
luck. Exeter had traitors among his domestic servant 
who had repeatedly warned the council that all was 1 
right, and that some secret movement was prepari 
2. At length the information became precise. They 
reported that two Cornish gentlemen had for some ti me 
past been quietly engaging men, who were to rise at ἃ 
given signal. They were then to assemble in arms, and 
declare Piixeter heir-apparent to the throne. 3. He 
would not act against so high a noble without clea 
evidence. But te despatched privately two of 
attendants into Cornwall to make inquiries, directi 
them to represent themselves as being merely on avi sit 
to their friends, and to do their best to discover the t 
4. The result was an entire confirmation of the stor 
It was found that for several years a project had been 
foot for a movement in favour of Exeter. 5. The tr 
was still further established by a coincidence. Αὐ Ὁ ᾿ 
same time as Henry’s messengers were reporting, a m aD, 
was arrested on suspicion of being an agent of the Catho- 
1105, He was to be taken to London, and, according 
the usual mode of conveyance, he was placed on h 
back, with his feet tied under the horse’s belly. On 1 
road it so happened he was met and recognised by o: 


covered, took time by the forelock, and told the y 


story to the authorities himself. 
νον’ 278 


mspiracies against Henry usually met with ill-luck. 
Exeter had ἘΑΉΟΙΝ among his domestic servants, who had 


_ that some secret movement was preparing. 
ey ~~ 


example, is a thoroughly modern artifice, and not the least 
like the straightforward style of Greek prose. We can, how- 
ever, here get over the difficulty by employing a turn which 
very common in Greek, and just gives the general sense : 

8 amely, to say ‘both the others who SAD ues against the oe 
were Εν, and especially Exeter, οἵ τε ἄλλοι... .. καὶ 


: ἮΝ verb. ‘All was not right’ is idiomatic: perhaps it will 
be enough to say ‘bade them be on their guard.’ For 
‘movement,’ say ‘ treachery’ or ‘plot.’ 


τε ἄλλοι ὅσοι TH βασιλεῖ ἐπεβούλευον, καὶ οὐχ ἥκιστα ὁ 
*Héérnpos. τοῦτον γὰρ προδιδόντες τινὲς τῶν οἰκετῶν 
4 πολλὰ ἤδη ἤγγελλον τῇ βουλῇ ὅτι φυλάσσεσθαι δεῖ, ὡς 
δόλου τινὸς παρασκευαζομένου. 


Pes Re he 
= length the information became precise. They reported 
that two Cornish gentlemen had for some time past been 
- quietly engaging men who were to rise at a given signal. 
They were then to assemble in arms and declare Exeter 
heir-apparent to the throne. 

_ Again the opening curt clause is unidiomatic in Greek. 
is best to tack it on to what follows somewhat in this 
‘They reported more precisely that, etc. The last 
se, ‘They were then to assemble, etc., as being part of 


he arrangement, it is also best to join on. As to the 


4 


—_ 
ς 


aa. | AXETER, ¥ Neer it 


Ἢ repeatedly warned the council that all was not right, and — 


The very first sentence offers a difficulty ; for to open 
with a generalisation, of which the story that follows is an 


ay ἥκιστα. ... Inthe next clause we must obviously make 
2 servants the subject; and the real act—‘ repeatedly warned’ 
ΤῊΝ the sentence tells us of, will naturally be the prin- 


_ The Greek will then run: ἐδυστύχησαν μὲν οὖν οἱ 


ei 


Wh a eae 
ce. bai wen, Be ABS γι. 


ἀν, 5. “4 


4 


ΕΝ ΤΌ) wart νυς aol wal 
ey PD Ee ea παν Sy ΒΟΥ, ᾿ 
ῃ See 
ἡ Ἣν ayes 
? ἔτ - ὅν. 
> < vay ao, , “aly ; ἘΠ Ὁ ᾧ 
᾿ ᾿ re rs 
i ἢ ἀρὰς 


- 


ΠΟΥ ΤΡ LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


phrases: ‘ gentlemen,’ if there is emphasis on the ‘cla S- 
distinction, may be ἱππεῖς : if no such emphasis, ἄνδρες 
enough. Here we may take our choice. ‘Engaging’ here 
is not in its common sense of ‘hiring, but simply meat 
‘persuading,’ πείθειν.  ‘Heir-apparent’ is διάδοχος T 
ἀρχῆς. 2 
The whole is then: τέλος δὲ σαφέστερον ΤΙ ἐμήνυσαν, τ 
ὡς ἱππεῖς δύο Θετταλοὶ πάλαι ἄνδρας τινὰς λανθάνουσι 
pee ἐπειδὰν καιρὸς γένηται, ἐπαναστῆναι, καὶ her 
ITAwWY συνελθόντας πᾶσι προειπεῖν τὸν ᾿Πι!ξέτηρον δεῖ τ 
τῷ βασιλεῖ διάδοχον γενέσθαι τῆς ἀρχῆς. 


friends, and to do their best to discover the truth. 


There is here in the sense, though after the common — 
English fashion slightly concealed, an antithesis between _ 
what he did privately and what he was reluctant to do openly. 
This in the Greek should appear more plainly; φανερῶς — 
μὲν... οὐκ ἤθελεν. Again, ‘act’ is suggestive rather a ἢ 
clear: express the full meaning in Greek, and say ‘ — 
violence. ‘On a visit’ is only come to.’ San 

_ We shall then have: ὁ δὲ βασιλεύς φανερῶς μὲν ἐπὶ 
τοσοῦτον ἄνδρα οὐδὲν ἤθελε βίαιον δρᾶσαι, ὡς οὔπα ἐδ 
πιστὰ ἔχων τεκμήρια' λάθρα δὲ, ὑπηρέτα δύω ἐκεῖσε, 
ἔπεμψε πευσομένω περὶ τοῦ πράγματος, κελεύσ 


παρὰ φίλους φάσκειν ἥκειν, ὥστε πάσῃ τέχνῃ ἐξευρ 
τἀληθές. 


Note (1) the position of φάσκειν, shufiled into the sentence as usual ; 
—(2) that φάσκειν and φάσκων are commoner (in Thucydides’ time a) 
than φάναι and das ;—(3) πάσῃ τέχνῃ, idiomatic for ‘by all means.” 


ive EXETER: (32: ‘81 


<5 ‘The result was an entire confirmation of the story. It was 
ς΄ found that for several years a project had been on foot for 
: 3 - @ movement in favour of Exeter. 


ΟΕ χρυ clause personal: ‘the messengers reported the same 
is the others, that, etc. It is by this time hardly nec 
= to Resolain how such common abstracts as ‘project,’ ‘ on foot, 
- ‘movement’ are to be done. ‘In favour of’ offers perhaps 
_ more difficulty: we might say, rather vaguely and generally, 
* ‘to promote the cause of Exeter’: or more precisely, and 
δ 120: better, ‘ that pace might claim the government.’ 
‘Promote the cause’ would be τὰ ἐκείνου σπεύδειν. 
‘Claim’ would be ἀντιποιεῖσθαι. 

We shall then have: of δὲ ἐξελέγξαντες παραπλησία 
ἐκείνοις ἤγγειλαν, πολλὰ ἤδη ἔτη στάσιν τινας παρασκευ- 
oO ἀντιποιεῖσθαι τῆς ἀρχῆς τὸν ᾿Ε)ξέτηρον. 


Bs: The truth was still further established by a coincidence. At 
τῇ the same time as Henry’s messengers were reporting, a 

- man was arrested on suspicion of being an agent of the 
Catholics. He was taken to London, and, according to the 
usual mode of conveyance, was placed on horseback with 
his feet tied under the horse’s belly. On the road it so 


conspirators, who, fearing all was about to be discovered, 
took time by the forelock, and told the whole story to the 
authorities himself. 


Al The first ΤῈ clause must again be made plain narra- 
tive: as thus, ‘ The poo WDE thing also happened so that 
“they believed still more.’ Only it would make the whole 


_were peporting this.’ We thus shall start fair with our story. 
On suspicion’ is ws. ‘Catholics’ offers some difficulty, as 
there is nothing the least corresponding to it in Greek: 
Ε΄... these circumstances it is perhaps best to say ‘ enemies,’ 
or ‘those in France,’ or, simply and very conveniently, ‘ those 


happened that he was met and recognised by one of the. 


a little more correct and lucid if we began with ‘ While they | 


ai 


82 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE, ~~ [Χχ. 


thence, or even ‘those across the sea.’ ‘ Usual mode of 
conveyance’ may be much shortened: ‘under the horse’s 
belly’ may be simply ‘beneath.’ In the last clause it will 
be obviously better to make the conspirator the subject all 
through. ‘Took time by the forelock’ is done briefly by 
the word φθάνω. 
We then turn the whole sentence as follows: ἅμα δὲ ἐν 
ᾧ ταῦτα ἐδήλουν κατὰ τύχην τοιόνδε TL ἐγένετο ὥστε καὶ 
a / ες \ \ / e BA x | 
μᾶλλον πιστεύειν. ἁλοὺς yap δή TLS ὡς ἄγγελος OV παρὰ 
Le) 7 > ΡΥ 2} Ui 5, 7 5 εὖ \ \ 
TOV πέραν, ἐπεὶ ἐς πόλιν ἔδει κομίζειν, ἐφ᾽ ἵππῳ KATA TO 
3 \ / "6 S la) ἴω « \ 
εἰωθὸς καθήμενος, δεδεμένων κάτωθεν τῶν ποδῶν, οὕτω δὴ 
ἀπήγετο. ἐν δὲ τῇ ὁδῷ τῶν ξυνωμοτῶν τις ἐντυχὼν ἀνέγνω 
τὸν ἄνδρα. καὶ δεδιὼς μὴ κατάδηλοι μέλλουσι γενέσθαι, 
φθάσας πρὸς τοὺς ἄρχοντας αὐτὸς τὰ πάντα ἐμήνυσεν. 


Note (1) the actives πιστεύειν and κομίζειν with subjects unexpressed 
but readily supplied ;—(2) οὕτω δὴ after circumstances fully ex- 
plained ;—(3) μὴ with indicative ;—(4) the pregnant use of πρὸς τοὺς 
ἄρχοντας, implying ‘ went’ to the archons. 


ee .". 


XI.—PLANCIUS—(Cicrro). 


φ πὶ A 
. an 2 , 
‘4 “ >» - 
{ἃ in ἐς --- 
Σ 


ς me what distinctions of the kind Plancius has won: 
fin truth those whom you speak of had been elected 


1 ather earned their triumphs because they had conducted 


appointed. 2. You ask me what service he has seen: 


from his military duties so much time as he thought better 
to devote to the protection of my person. 3, You 
me whether he is an eloquent pleader: I reply, no; 


Ἄς 


if there were anybody who could allege that my client 


plishments are only matter for reproach in those cases 
where men have made professions which they cannot 


its, or special knowledge. 6, In buying slaves, if we 
ἐν ἶ Ἵ ν Ss : 


ὡς - ᾿ 
5 Ὰ 
i > ‘ 2 
fi ve te oe -- ὰ ζ : 


Ἢ Hi You quote the triumphs of Marius and Didius, and 


to magistracies because they had triumphed, and not 
themselves well in the offices to which they had been 


though he has been a soldier in Crete, a tribune in Mace- 
donia; and though, when he was general, he only spared — 


he is the next best thing to that, namely, he does 
not even himself claim to be one: is he a skilled lawyer? 


had ever given him bad legal advice. 4, Those accom- — 


honesty, industry, and carefulness. 7. So Rome chooses 


εἶ ἐκεῖνοι διὰ τὰς πομπὰς ἦρξαν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ μάν ΟΝ ἐν τι 


_ -Wevoay. 


aorist giving the act of becoming officials (ingressive aoris 


ments for which we bought him, But if we buy a ma 
to be a steward or shepherd, we care for noting but ) 


her magistrates to be stewards of the state: if they baer 
any accomplishments besides, she is quite willing i a 
should be so: but if not, she is satisfied that they shoul lea 
be men of worth and high character. pee 


1. You quote the triumphs of Marius and Didius, and waa me 
what distinctions of the kind Plancius has won: as if in 
truth those whom you speak of had been elected to magis- 
tracies because they had triumphed, and not rather ania 
their triumphs because they had conducted themselves well 
in the offices to which they had been appointed. 


In the first clause, ‘quote’ and ‘ask,’ being connected, 
must be turned into participle and verb: ‘ triumphs’ an ἢ 
‘distinctions’ will be both verbs —‘ how he triumphed, hae 

‘when he was distinguished.’ The rest of the first sentence eg 
is plain enough: we only need to remember that ‘and not 
rather’ in Greek is generally ‘ dué not rather” ‘Asif’ may 7 
be either ὥσπερ with the genitive absolute, or ὥσπερ ef 
with a finite verb. ee 

We shall then have: Kira δὲ τὸν Μάριον καὶ τὸν Δίδιον. 


Ph 


¢ Ss , ¢ fon et > ΄ ? n cf. eae 
ὡς ἐπόμπευον διεξιών, οὑτοσί πότε ἐτιμήθη ἐρωτᾷς, ὥσπερ. 
ἀρχαῖς. ἃς ἐπετρέποντο εὖ πράξαντες οὕτω δὴ ἐπό Lb. 

Notice (1) ἦρξαν, simple Greek for ‘were elected to magistraci 


Ἧ accusative after ἐπιτρέπομαι, ‘to be intrusted with a thi r 


circumstances. 


._ PEP PLANCLUS. ἘΠ 


ἃ soldier in Crete, a tribune in Macedonia; and though, 
when he was general, he only spared from his military 
duties so much time as he thought better to devote to the 
protection of my person. 


ΔΗ ‘Service,’ of course, must be a verb: ‘ when and where he 
has served. The rest of the sentence involves a rather 


used where in Greek it would not do at all. In Greek the 
_ nearest thing to ‘though’ is the idiomatic use of ὅστις, ‘a 
man who... For ‘tribune’ we had better, perhaps, use 
5 Greek word Aoyayds. For ‘spared from his military 
: ditties, say ‘absented. himself from service.’ In the last 
‘in order to protect Cicero he had to be at Rome: and so we 
had better say, ‘when he thought it needful to be at Rome 
in order to protect me.’ 

_ The Greek will then be: εἶτα δὲ ἐρωτᾷς ποῦ καὶ πότε 
éotpdtever ὅστις ἐν μὲν Κρήτῃ ὁπλίτης ἣν, ἐν δὲ 


‘To στρατόπεδον ἀπέλειπεν, εἰ μὴ ὅσον ἐπιδημεῖν Gero 
TO σ ρ Ε᾿ μῆ 1 t 

Qian 4 > \ “Ὁ 

δεῖν ὥστε ἐμοὶ βοηθεῖν. 


_ Note that the idea ‘only was absent so long as’ is more sharply 
‘given by a negative turn: ‘never left except so long.’ 


8: You ask me whether he is an eloquent pleader : I reply, no ; 


but he is the next best thing to that, namely, he does not 
even himself claim to be one: is he a skilled lawyer? as 


ever given him bad legal advice. 


oe | This time we might begin with a direct question: to repeat 
‘you ask me whether’ each time would in Greek be perhaps 
rather wearisome. ‘An eloquent pleader’ is δεινὸς λέγειν. 


, . ; Ν . 


δὰ}. 
tele 


ἂν | 


oS ask me what service he has seen; though he has been. 


catchy point of idiom, namely, that the English ‘ though’ is | 


clause, there is a point of the real fact omitted, namely, that. | 


ΨΝ Sovia Novayés, ἐπεὶ δὲ στρατηγὸς ἐγένετο οὐδέ 
ακεδονίᾳ λοχαγός, L δὲ στρατηγὸς ἐγ ὑδέποτε, 


if there were anybody who could allege that my client Πα 


a The next best thing to that” would be best done by a rela- ὁ 


~ - 


86 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


tive: ὅπερ δεύτερόν ἐστιν, or, better, ὅπερ μετ᾽ ἐκεῖνο, 
ἄριστον. ‘A skilled lawyer’ may be done quite simply by — 
‘skilled in the laws, τῶν νόμων ἔμπειρος. The last clause 
is rather tiresome for Greek if done literally, and we had 
- better perhaps simply say, ‘at any rate nobody could charge 
him, οἷο. : οὐδεὶς γοῦν ἂν μέμφοιτο. ‘Bad legal advice” 
is, according to the usual principle, ‘ advised badly about the 
laws.’ oe 

The Greek will then be: μῶν ἄρα δεινὸς λέγειν ; ἥκιστα" 
ἀλλ᾽ ὅπερ μετ᾽ ἐκεῖνο ἄριστον, οὐδ᾽ αὐτὸς ἀξιοῖ εἶναι. μῶν 
νόμων ἔμπειρος ; οὐδεὶς γοῦν τουτῳὶ ἂν ἐπιτιμῴη ὡς 
κακῶς ποτε περὶ τῶν νόμων συμβουλεύσαντι. 

Note (1) ἥκιστα for ‘no’: the excitable Greek has numerous stronger 


words for ‘yes’ and ‘no’ ;—(2) the terseness given by not repeating ἵν 
the needless words, ἐστίν, δεινὸς λέγειν, ἦν. ; 


͵ 


4, Those accomplishments are only matter for reproach in those 
cases where men have made professions which they cannot _ 
fulfil, not in the case of those who admit that they ha ! 
never given their attention to such studies. 3 


The English here is distinctly confused; for it is not in 
either case the accomplishments which are matter for reproach, 
but in-one case the pretended possession of them, and in the — 
other the absence of them. We must therefore set this right 
in the Greek; and the simplest way of i this is to 
say, ‘these things are not to be blamed,’ or ‘no one would 
put such blame on a man who...’ or ‘blame for such — 
things a man who...’ ‘Given their attention to such 
studies’ is only rather stately English for ‘learned these 
things.’ 

There is no further diftenlty, and the Greek will be: 
ἀλλὰ μὴν τοιαῦτα ἐκείνοις εἰκότως ἄν τις μέμφοιτο, οἱ 
πολλὰ ὑποσχόμενοι οὐδὲν ἔπραξαν, οὐ τοῖς ὁμολογοῦσιν — 
μήπω ταῦτα μεμαθηκέναι. 


᾽ 

~ 

Ἢ 

gz 

es 
ORY 

As 
te 


PLANCIUS. 87 


; # integrity of character, not fluency of tongue, accomplish- 
_ ments, or special knowledge. 


ΗΝ here offers any real problem, except ae now 
rn iliar point of what I may call the ‘ personalisation of the 
lish’: this clause, if so treated, will become something 
ike this, ‘Choosing a magistrate we must seek .. . just, 
good, and faithful . . . not fluent,’ ete. And perhaps it will 
be more in accordance with the natural Greek turn of ex- 
oo if we make the negative qualifications come first 
—‘not the fluent . . . but the honest. . . The rest of the 
isn ints turn Εν on Boone of eerie ‘Honest’ is 
a n Greek δίκαιος, or πιστός : for ‘ good,’ ‘ upright,’ ‘ straight- 
_ forward, ‘respectable, there are many words in Greek, 
s in English: ἀγαθός, σπουδαῖος, ἐπιεικής, καλὸς καὶ 
5 ἀγαθός, etc. 

ὃ _ The whole will be --πἄρχοντα γὰρ αἱρουμένους οὔτε τὸν 
δεινὸν λέγειν δεῖ ζητεῖν οὔτε τὸν τέχνης ἢ ἐπιστήμης τινὸς 
ἔμπειρον, ἀλλ᾽ εἴ τις σπουδαῖος καὶ πιστὸς καὶ δίκαιος 
ὧν τυγχάνει. ᾿ 


‘oa 


Note the convenient εἴ τις, and the idiomatic τυγχάνει, so often 
occurring in Greek where there is no tendency in English to say 
‘happens’: particularly as here, when the language is general, and 
are speaking of any specimen of a class. 


In buying slaves, if we are purchasing a carpenter or weaver, 
we object to one, however honest, if he does not possess 
the accomplishments for which we bought him. But if we 
buy aman to be asteward or shepherd, we care for nothing 
_ but honesty, industry, and carefulness. 


The structure is quite easy: only minor points need be 
ced. ‘Object’ is rather vague: it means something 
Ὁ precise, like ‘we will not have, ‘we do not buy.’ 
ccomplishments’ is here the professional knowledge, and 
must be τέχνη. ‘For which we bought him:’ it will 


ens τως ἐπ Ser πε ον eo ee Reig Phas > 


ce 


88 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


be sufficient to say ἧς δεῖ. Again, in the last sentence, 
‘we care for nothing but’ is a little less precise than it 


would be in Greek: we should say ‘all else is of no value 


compared with,’ ‘we count of highest importance to get.’ 
Again, the qualities ‘honesty, industry,’ etc., will be done 
by adjectives. 

The sentence will then be: οὕτω γὰρ δούλους ὠνούμενοι, 
. ἐὰν μὲν τέκτονα ἢ ὑφαντὴν ζητῶμεν, οὐδὲ τὸν δικαίοτατον 
ἂν πριαίμεθα, τῆς τέχνης ἧς δεῖ μὴ ἔμπειρον ὄντα" ἐὰν δὲ 
ποιμένα ἢ ταμίαν, τἄλλα πάντα παρ᾽ οὐδὲν ποιούμεθα 
πρὸς τὸ πιστὸν ἄνδρα καὶ ἐπιμελῆ καὶ φιλόπονον κτήσ- 
ασθαι. : 


Note: we say παρ᾽ οὐδέν ποιεῖσθαι, but περὶ πολλοῦ, περὶ πλείονος, 


περὶ πλείστου ποιεῖσθαι. 


7. So Rome chooses her magistrates to be stewards of the state : 
if they have any accomplishments besides, she is quite 
willing it should be so: but if not, she is satisfied that 
they should be men of worth and high character. 


This being rhetoric, we may use the abstract ‘the city,’ a 
thing which in narrative we should not do, but say ‘the 
citizens.’ In the rest there is hardly anything yes we have 
not already had. 


= 


The last sentence will then run: ὡσαύτως δὲ τοὺς ; 


an a an / 
ἄρχοντας ἢ πόλις αἱρεῖται ὥστε τοῦ κοινοῦ ταμίας εἶναι, 
καὶ ἐὰν μὲν ἄλλην τινὰ ἐπιστήμην ἔχωσιν, ἀγαπᾷ, ἐὰν δὲ 
μή, ἀρκεῖ γοῦν ἐπιεικεῖς καὶ δικαίους αἱρεθῆναι. 


Note (1) the particles ὡσαύτως, μέν, δέ, and γοῦν ;: —(2) ὥστε, used, 


as it frequently is, of the contemplated consequence, and so almost — 


final ;—(3) the more idiomatic repetition in Greek of the main idea 


αἱρεθῆναι, cee in English we say ‘ they should be,’ meaning the men — 


who are chosen should be. 


XII —COBDEN—(Bricut). 


1, I REMEMBER the time well. The sufferings throughout 
the e country were fearful, and you who live now, but were 
; of an age to observe what was passing in the country 
, can have no idea of the state of your country in that 


depths of grief, I might almost say despair; for the 
jand sunshine of my house had been extinguished. 


inted life and of a too brief happiness, was lying still 
1 cold in the chamber above us. 3, He called upon me 
his friend, and addressed me, as you might suppose, 
words of condolence, After a time he looked up and 


try where wives, mothers, and children are dying of 


is past, I would advise you to come with me and we will 
invitation. I knew that the description he had given 
of the homes of thousands was not an exaggerated de- 
ser iption. I felt in my conscience there was a work 
which somebody must do, and therefore I accepted his 
mvitation, and from that time we never ceased to labour 


on the behalf of the resolution we had made, 
| G 


that was left of my young wife, except the memory of. 


‘There are thousands of houses at thismoment in the 
er. 4, Now, when the first paroxysm of your grief 


vever rest till this cruel law is repealed” 5. I accepted | 


2. At that time when he called upon me I wasin | 


oi a 
oy, > 1 Ὅν: . 
si aby S . 

Se αι, ee ie ee 


Gono LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. — 


1. I remember the time well. The sufferings throughout the 
country were fearful: and you who live now, but were not 
of an age to observe what was passing in the country then, | 
can have no idea of the state of your country in that 
year. 


The difficulty in this beautiful passage (from Mr. Bright's 
account of the beginnings of his labours in the work οὗ 
agitating against the Corn Laws) is to give the feeling. The 
style has to be quite simple and unadorned like the English : 
the touches of poetic expression must not be omitted, or 
the effect will be lost: but they must be used with extreme 
care, or the Greek will seem turgid and artificial, which will 
be worse than anything. 

In the first sentence the main difficulty is with the word 
country, which is no less than three times repeated : this is, 
even in the English, plain almost to baldness, and in Greek 
would hardly be tolerable. Once we have noticed it, it is not 
difficult to avoid (in translating) the repetition. Again, 
the simple phrase ‘you who live now ’can hardly be done liter- 
ally: the antithesis would be false, because they were living 
then as well as now: and Greek is very careful to avoid such — 
blemishes. We will translate by the sense, and say, ‘who 
now are men, but then were children,’ The rest is easy, and 
the first sentence will then run: καὶ ἐκεῖνον τὸν καιρὸν εὖ 
μέμνημαι" πάντες yap οἱ ἐν TH χώρᾳ οὕτῳ δεινὰ ἐταλαι- 
πωροῦντο ὥστε μηδ᾽ ἂν εἰκάζειν δύνασθαι τοὺς νῦν μὲν 
ἄνδρας γενομένους τότε δὲ παῖδας ὄντας οὐδ᾽ ἱκανοὺς τὰ 
τοιαῦτα ἐνθυμεῖσθαι. 


Note: The negative in the last clause, if it came close to the τοὺς, 
would naturally be the generic μή, but it is so far off that in the 
phrase ‘ children, and not capable,’ Greek would naturally revert to 
οὐδέ, 


COBDEN. wg SY ΟἹ 


. Αἱ that time when he called upon me, I was in the depths 
of grief, I might almost say despair: for the light and sun- 
- shine of my house had been extinguished. All that was 
left of my young wife, except the memory of a sainted life 
and of a too brief happiness, was lying still and cold in the 
chamber above us. 

_ We might begin ‘I myself too was,’ etc. a sort of natural 
Εἰ τ είμε into connection of the general misery and the 
special personal unhappiness ; which, though a little more 
artificial than would be adopted in the narrative style, is 
csi ple enough in reality, and quite appropriate in the style 
of the orators. The real difficulties begin with the metaphor 
tien: and sunshine,’ which we cannot omit altogether, as it 
forms the main point of the sentence: but we must soften it 
considerably, to prevent it being too startlingly poetical. 
The best way is to convert the metaphor into a simile, and 
Beige it well into the middle of the clause: ‘for out of my 
‘house, as it were, light and the sun had been quenched.’ The 
- exceedingly beautiful and carefully written sentence that 
aor is the hardest of all to do satisfactorily. Perhaps 
the best thing to do is to put the plain fact first: ‘my young 
wife was lying above dead’: and then to add the more 
We crrative part, softened down as much as possible without 
‘spoiling it. In this sort of case one must proceed with the 
greatest caution, and even then tastes will differ materially 
‘as to the result. I should suggest something of the follow- 
ing kind: ἐγὼ δὲ καὶ αὐτός, ὅτε ὡς ἐμὲ προσῆλθεν, ἐν 
τ πένθει ὧν ἔτυχον καὶ ὡς εἰπεῖν ἀμηχανῶν" νεωστὶ γὰρ 
ἐ ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας ὥσπερ φῶς μοι καὶ ἥλιος ἀπέσβη. νεκρὰ 
ἄνω ἔκειτο ἡ νέα γυνή, οὐδὲ λοιπόν μοι οὐδὲν ἣν 
ραμύθιον πλὴν τὴν ἐκείνης θείαν τινὰ ἀρετήν μνημο- 
εἰν, καὶ τὴν ἐμαυτοῦ εὐδαιμονίαν ὡς θᾶσσον δὴ ἀπώλετο. 
=. nany case θεῖος gives as near a translation as we can 
want for the English word ‘sainted’: and ‘still and cold’ is 
exalted an expression for Greek prose: we must reduce 
the tone of it, if the phrase may be permitted, 


τῷ 


92 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


3, He called upon me as his friend, and addressed me, as you - 
might suppose, with words of condolence. After a time he — 


looked up and said: ‘There are thousands of houses at 


this moment in the country where wives, mothers, and 


: ; ὲ 
children are dying of hunger. 


I should suggest that it would be well to connect by 
beginning with οὕτως οὖν ἔχοντα, ‘while I was in this” 
state’: also to prepare for ‘after a time,’ by inserting inthe — 
first clause the word τέως. ‘As you might suppose’ is best 


done by οἷον εἰκός. In the last clause there is nothing 


* 
" νὰν ἃ 
Sed Soa ΚΝ 


| ae 


- much to notice, except that, as the speaker had lost his wife 


(and that is the real connection of thought), it is clearer in 


Greek to bring out this by saying ‘not only wives, but also Ὁ 


mothers.’ 


The whole will then be as follows: οὕτως οὖν ἔχοντα, 


πρὸς ἐμὲ ὡς φίλος ὧν ἐκεῖνος προσελθὼν τέως μὲν οἷον 


εἰκὸς παρεμυθεῖτο: τέλος δὲ ἀναβλέψας μυρίας ἔφη οἰκίας. 
εἶναι ἐν τῇ γῇ οὗπερ λιμῷ ἀπόλλυνται οὐ γυναῖκες μόνον 


ἀλλὰ καὶ μητέρες καὶ παιδία. 


4. ‘Now, when the first paroxysm of your griefis past, I would ~ 
advise you to come with me, and we will never rest till 


this cruel law is repealed.’ . 


The oratio obliqua should naturally be continued, For — 
‘first paroxysm, we may perhaps say, ‘now, when my grief 


μ »" + i 
Wale Soy Ae 


becomes mellow, using the idiomatic but rather poetical εἶ 


word πέπων. For the idiomatic ‘never rest, use πάσῃ 


μηχανῇ, or πάντα πράσσειν. For ‘cruel, which is rather 


too personifying a word, we had better say χαλεπός. We 
shall then have: πείθειν οὖν, ἐπειδὰν. θρηνήσαντέ por 
TET OV γένηται Ἢ λυπή, ἑαυτῷ ξυγγενόμενον πάντα 


πράσσειν ὅπως τὸν χαλεπὸν τοῦτον νόμον ἀναιρήσομεν. 


had given of the homes of thousands was not an exagger- 
_ ated description. I felt in my conscience there was a work 
which somebody must do, and therefore I accepted his 
τς invitation: and from that time we never ceased to labour 
hard on behalf of the resolution we had made. 


- 


The first thing to notice here is the comminuted style of 
English as compared with Greek. It is broken up, and thus 
leads to repetition: ‘I accepted his invitation’ comes twice 
in the piece. The fact is, that in English the logical arrange- 
ment is just a little sacrificed, in order to put the fact in a 
mmary form at the head of the sentence: this carries with 
the necessity of saying the same thing twice over: first at 


‘elation of fact: then again later, when the reasons are 
given. This repetition, which in English adds greatly to the 
7 sidity and impressiveness, and is a really artistic device 
used by all the greatest orators, is alien to the spirit of Greek. 
The longer connected sentence, with the feeling leading up to 
the fact at the end, is more in accordance with their idiom. 

_ For the rest, it would be rather tiresome in Greek to 
repeat ‘thousands,’ it will be enough to say ‘the people.’ 
‘Not exaggerated’ may be done simpler by saying ‘true.’ 


consists only of small points of order and words, which will 
best be seen from the Greek: εἰδὼς δὲ ἐγὼ τὸν δῆμον τῷ 
TL τοιαῦτα πάσχοντα [or οὐδὲν μεῖζον ἐκεῖνον λέξαντα 
ἀληθῶς ἔπασχεν ὁ δῆμος] καὶ ὁμολογῶν ἅμα κατ 
υτὸν δεῖν τινα τούτῳ ἐπιχειρεῖν τῷ ἔργῳ, συνήνεσα 
τα αὐτῷ συμπράξειν καὶ ἐξ ἐκείνου τοῦ χρόνου 
δεπώποτε ἐπαυσάμεθα ἃ τότε ἔδοξεν ἐξεργαζόμενοι. 


i hy ἈΝ ἃ . a . ; 
the beginning, as a summary of the outward narrative, the 


¢ 


‘In my conscience’ will be simply κατ᾽ ἐμαυτόν. The rest 


XITI.—PRESENT DISCONTENTS— (Burks). 


1. Nothing indeed can be. more unnatural than the 
present convulsions of the country, if the above account 
be a true one. I confess I shall assent to it with great 
reluctance, and only on the compulsion of the clearest and — 
firmest proofs: because their account resolves itself into 
this short but discouraging proposition, that we have a 
very good ministry, but that we are a very bad people; 
that we set ourselves to bite the hand that feeds us; that 
with a malignant insanity we oppose the measures, and 
ungratefully vilify the persons, of those whose sole object 
is our own peace and prosperity. 2, It is besides no 
small ageravation of the public misfortune, that the dis- 
ease, on this hypothesis, appears to be without remedy. 
If the wealth of the nation be the cause of its turbulence, 

I imagine it is not proposed to introduce poverty, as a 
constable, to keep the peace. 3. If our dominions abroad 
are the root which feed all this rank luxuriance of sedition, 
it is not intended to cut them off in order to famish the 
fruit. If our liberty has enfeebled the executive power, 
there is no design, I hope, to call in the aid of despotism, 
to fill up the deficiencies of law. 4. Whatever may be 
intended, these things are not yet professed. We seem 
therefore to be driven to absolute despair; for we have no 
other materials to work upon than those out of which 
God has been pleased to form the inhabitants of this island. 
94 


yg y vA 


PRESENT DISCONTENTS. 95 


Ἢ Nothing indeed can be more unnatural than the present con- 
vulsions of the country, if the above account be a true one. 
I confess I shall assent to it with ‘great reluctance, and 
only on the compulsion of the clearest and firmest proofs : 
because their account resolves itself into this short but dis- 

_ couraging proposition, that we have a very good ministry, 
but that we are a very bad people; that we set ourselves 
to bite the hand that feeds us; that with a malignant 
insanity we oppose the measures, and ungratefully vilify 
the persons, of those whose sole object is our own peace 
and prosperity. 

We must clearly begin with the condition (or protasis) of the 

- gentence. ‘The present convulsions’ may be done by a verb: 

 ¢what the people suffer’ In the next sentence ‘great 

reluctance’ had better be the idiomatic ἑκών γε εἶναι. 

_ ‘Only on the compulsion’ will be ‘not unless I were com- 

_ pelled.” Down to ‘firmest proofs,’ the piece may be done 

with fair literalness; but the rest of the sentence requires ἃ 

good deal of ΠΩΣ The extreme abstractness of the 

- clause which begins ‘because their account resolves itself 

into,’ etc., forces us to forsake the Greek; we must go by 

the sense. Something of this sort: ‘What do they say? 

This in reality—short but painful to say—that our politicians 

are, etc. A little iv on we come to the phrase ‘ we bite 

the hand that feeds us.’ This is obviously too violent a 

; Ε΄... to be possible in Greek without some sort of 

ee earation to soften it; the simplest way is to convert it 

into a simile straight ‘off, and say, ‘like bad dogs we 

- bite the hand,’ etc. In the last sentence we shall be wise to 

“use the common device of putting the relative part of the 

clause first; so that it will run somewhat "Ὁ this way: 

3 - ‘those who aim at nothing more than peace,’ etc., ‘these 

_ we abuse, and resist.’ 

The whole will then be as follows: εἰ δὲ ταῦτα ἀληθῆ 

λέγουσιν, οὐδὲν δήπου ἀτοπώτερόν ἐστιν ὧν στασιά- 

δι ουσιν [or πάσχουσι καὶ στασιάζουσιν) οἱ πολῖται" ἐγὼ. 


96 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. | 


δὲ οὐδαμῶς ἂν ἑκών γε εἷναι πιθοίμην, εἰ μὴ σαφεστάτοις 
καὶ βεβαιοτάτοις τεκμηρίοις ἀναγκαζοίμην' τί γὰρ ἐκεῖνοι, 
ἄρα λέγουσιν; τοῦτο δήπου τῷ ὄντι λέγουσι, βραχὺ μὲν. 
λόγῳ, ἔργῳ δὲ λυπηρόν, ὅτι βελτίστους μὲν ἔχομεν τοὺ 
ἄρχοντας, αὐτοὶ δὲ οὐδενός ἔσμεν ἄξιοι, καὶ ὥσπερ φαῦλοι a 
κύνες τοὺς τρέφοντας δάκνομεν, καὶ μανίᾳ τινὶ ἠγριωμένοι 
τοὺς οὐδὲν μᾶλλον πράσσοντας ἢ ὅπως ἐν εἰρήνῃ καὶ εὐδαι- 
μονίᾳ ἐσόμεθα αἰσχρῶς ὅμως ἐπηρεάζομεν καὶ οἷς ἂν 
βουλεύωσιν ἀεὶ ἐναντιούμεθα. 


Note (1) the long participial clause τοὺς οὐδὲν. . . ἐσόμεθα might 
be done by a relative, oimep. Then after ἐσόμεθα insert with the usual 
lucidity of rhetoric τούτους ὅμως, etc. ;—(2) I use οὐδὲν after τοὺς, 
where the generic μηδὲν would equally well suit, because the objector 
would naturally like to state that these politicians actually have no 
other motive. 


2. It is besides no small aggravation of the public misfortune, 
that the disease, on this hypothesis, appears to be without 
remedy. If the wealth of .the nation be the cause of its 
turbulence, I imagine it is not proposed to introduce 
poverty, as a constable, to keep the peace. 


We must clearly avoid the extreme abstractness of the 
first phrase. The simplest way of doing this is to make ‘the 
country’ the subject of the whole sentence somewhat in the 
following way: ‘And the city suffers still more severely in 
this respect, that,’ etc. In the second half also the idio- 
matic way of presenting the idea is to make the ‘nation’ the 
subject. Notice further that the main reason in English why 
the clause is so abstract is that the writer wants to bring 
‘the wealth’ strongly to the front, and make ‘the cause’ the 
predicate ; and that this is done in Greek quite easily and 
simply by the order of the words. The clause will then run, — 
‘For if on account of wealth, the people,’ ete, and the 
whole will be in Greek as follows: καὶ ἔτ᾽ χαλεπώτερον 


rors ert Siok ia ἜΠΟΣ ee eee, oh” 
Ἐν 5 : 


σου οὐδὲν ἄκος ὑπάρχει. εἰ μὲν γὰρ διὰ πλοῦτον οὕτως 
δε. 9 > , \ / ΄ ? Ζ 
ταραχῇ εἰσιν, οὐ δήπου τὴν πενίαν φύλακα ἐπάξονται 


9. ΠῚ our dominions abroad are the root which feed all this 
rank luxuriance of sedition, it is not intended to cut them 
off in order to famish the fruit. If our liberty has 
enfeebled the executive power, there is no design, I hope, 
to call in the aid of despotism, to fill up the deficiencies of 
law. 


_- Again we have a metaphor too suddenly introduced for 
‘Greek: we must follow the same method as before, and con- 
f vert it into a simile: ‘if out of our foreign rule as out of a bad 
- root sedition has grown so strong,’ etc. ‘The fruit’ may be 
| «what grows from.’ In the second sentence there is no diffi- 
culty except the common one of abstracts; we need only say 
that ‘the executive power’ will be the nominative of the 
tence, and will be personal— the magistrates’: ‘if owing 
to our being free the magistrates are less powerful, etc. 
The only thing that need be added is that very often in 
Greek the liveliness of the sentence is very much increased 
by introducing a question instead of expressing the sense by 
a negative, as in the English. So here, both clauses of this 
tence may be very well expressed by putting the thing in 
an interrogative shape. 

_ We shall then have: εἰ δὲ ἐκ τῆς ἔξωθεν ἀρχῆς ὥσπερ 
φαύλης ῥίζης ἐς τοσοῦτον ηὔξηται καὶ τέθηλεν ἡ στάσις, 
τερον ἐκείνην ἐξορύξουσιν, ὥστε τὰ ἐξ αὐτῆς γενόμενα 
χφθεῖραι ; εἰ δὲ διὰ τὸ ἐλευθέρους ἄρα εἶναι ἡμᾶς ἧσσον 
τοῦσιν οἱ ἄρχοντες, πότερον τὴν τυραννίδα διανοοῦνται 
καταστῆσαι ἵνα τὸ ἐλλιπὲς τῶν νόμων πληρωθῇ ; 


98 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


4, Whatever may be intended, these things are not yet pro- 


fessed. We seem therefore to be driven to absolute de- 
spair ; for we have no other materials to work upon than 
those out of which God has been pleased to form the 
inhabitants of this island. 


The first sentence is written in a very ironical spirit: and — 


it is a question if it would be well to translate it literally. 
It seems to me that in Greek it would be overdoing the 
irony to say it just as the English does: it would be enough 
to say ‘but they do not intend anything of the kind; at any 
rate they do not say so’: or perhaps still better and more 
close to the English: ‘if indeed they intend anything of this 
kind, at any rate they do not as yet say anything openly 
about it.’ The real difficulty is with the last phrase: ‘ other 


‘materials to work upon’ is a phrase very unlike the unmeta- — 


phorical expressions of Greek. The best way is to be rigidly 
concrete and precise, and to go generally by the sense: 


perhaps we may say ‘the persons we have to deal with are 


such as it has pleased,’ etc. ; and note here, further, that the 
sense is made much clearer by the regular Greek method of 


beginning with the relative: ‘of what kind it has seemed 


good to providence to make the inhabitants, etc. . . . of 
that kind are the men with whom we have to deal.’ 

The Greek of the whole will then be: εἰ μὲν δὴ τοιοῦτόν 
TL ἐν νῴ ἔχουσιν, GAN οὔπω γοῦν φανερῶς δηλοῦσιν" 
ὥστε οὐδὲν ἄλλ᾽ ἢ ἐς ἀπορίαν καθέσταμεν" οἵους γὰρ δὴ 


an +S \ if ἣν “ 5 al n 
θεώ ἔδοξε τοὺς ταύτην τὴν νῆσον ἐνοικοῦντας ποιῆσαι, 


τοιούτοις χρῆσθαι καὶ προσφέρεσθαι ἡμᾶς τοὺς πολιτευο- 
μένους ἀνάγκη. Or rather more literally—oddév yap 


7 e / - / Ων na i 
ἔχομεν OL TTONLTEVOMEVOL ᾧ χρησόμεθα πλὴν τῶν TAVTHNV 


\ a 3 7 Ὡ Ν avo > \ 
Τὴν νῆσον ἐνοικούντων, OLOUS τινᾶς θεῷ ἔδοξεν αὑτους. 


γενέσθαι. 


τ Ss. Le ee 
a . * ν 


ΧΙΝν.-- SENTIMENTAL’ POLITICS—(Burxe). 


1. Att this I know well enough will sound wild and 
Ε 10. to the profane hers of those vulgar and 
mechanical politicians, who have no place among us: a 
sort of people who think that nothing exists but whetl is 
rb ross and material: and who ee fore. far from being 
4 qualified to be directors of the great movement of empire, 
are not fit to turn a wheel in the machine. 2. But to 
‘men truly initiated and rightly taught, these ruling and 
“master principles, which in the opinion of such men as I 
have mentioned, have no substantial existence, are in 
i truth everything and all in all. 3. Magnanimity in 
politics is not seldom the truest wisdom: and a great 
empire and little minds go ill together. 4. If we are 
conscious of our situation, and ates with zeal to fill our 
place as becomes our station and ourselves, we ought to 
᾿ auspicate all our public proceedings on America with the 
old warning of the church, Surswm corda. We ought to 
elevate our minds to the greatness of that trust to which 
the order of Providence has called us. 5. By adverting 
to the dignity of this high calling our ancestors have 
turned a savage wilderness into a glorious empire: and 
hhave made the most extensive and the only honourable 
CO conquests, not by destroying, but by promoting the wealth, 
the number, and the happiness of the human race. 
6. Let us get an American revenue as we have got an. 
American empire, English privileges have made it all that 


: English ἜΞΩ alone will make it all it can be. 
99 5 


100 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE, 


1. Ali this, I know well enough, will sound wild and chimerical _ 
to the profane herd of those vulgar and mechanical poli- 
ticlans, who have no place among us; a sort of peoplewho 
think that nothing exists but what is gross and material; 
and who, therefore, far from being qualified to be directors 
of the great movement of empire, are not fit to turn a 
wheel in the machine. 


The difficulty of this very fine peroration of one of the 
best of Burke’s speeches lies not so much in the spirit, which _ 
is by no means remote from Greek, as in the diction and 
phraseology, which is often highly idiomatic and modern. — 
In the first sentence it is simple enough to substitute for 
‘this will sound’ the more personal turn ‘I shall seem.’ 
‘Chimerical’ may be ἀμήχανος : ‘vulgar,’ βάναυσος. 
‘Mechanical’ is difficult: perhaps,—as it is properly opposed 
to ‘men of insight,’—for ‘mechanical politicians’ we might 
use the word πάνδημος. ‘Profane herd’ again is hard: it 
contains, what is common in Burke’s rich and imaginative 
style, a suggested and concealed metaphor—comparing the 
self-styled practical politicians, in contrast to the men of 
wider thought, higher ideals, and truer insight, to the pro- 
fone persons or outsiders, as contrasted with the men who — 
are initiated into religious mysteries: a thought which might — 
easily be overdone, but which adds immensely to the force 
and effect of the passage, when, as here, it is lightly touched. 
On the whole, I think it had better be omitted, and we must 
trust to the word πανδήμοις for conveying something like the - 
taunt. If it be preferred to render it, we may say ὥσπερ 
ἀμυήτοις here, and then μεμυημένοις in the next sentence. 
- ‘Who have no place among us’ is catchy: ‘ who do not deserve 
a place in the city, or something of that kind. ‘Gross and 
material’ might be done with adjectives in Plato’s style, but 
we had better boldly say ‘but what they see and feel.’ 
Lastly, ‘a wheel in the machine’ cannot be turned literally. 
We should say ‘ not even the smallest part of the government.’ — 


νος Fo yg =" 


«% 
Φ Ines 
eA 


ΨΥ ΟΡ i ee ee a "| 
: ΤῊΝ - 7s ae at hs a ee 
ta . a.¢ 


x ‘SENTIMENTAL’ POLITICS. 101 


: The first sentence will then be: ταῦτα δὲ λέγων εὖ ofS 
ὅτι ; ἀμήχανα καὶ ἀνόητα δόξω λέγειν τοῖς βαναύσοις καὶ 
πανδήμοις τῶν σολυτευομένων οὺς μηδὲ μετεῖναι ἐχρῆν 
AS πόλεως" οὗτοι γάρ, οὐδὲ εἶναι οἰόμενοι οὐδὲν πχὴν ὧν 
ὁρῶσι καὶ αἰσθώνονται, οὐχ ἱκανοὶ δή εἰσιν οὐχ ὅπως 
ἀρχῆς ἀξιόχρεω ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ τὸ φαυλότατον 
: μέρος μεταχειρίσασθαι. 
᾿ς Note: For ‘great Seen: of empire’ I use the more concrete 
: a a considerable empire.’ 


2. But to men truly initiated and rightly taught, these ruling ~ 
_ and master principles, which in the opinion of such men as 
I have mentioned, have no substantial existence, are in 
truth everything and all in all. 

_ This sentence had better be broken into two. Instead of 
these ruling and master principles’ say ‘these things seem 
_ important and prevailing everywhere’: ‘and what the others 
2 do not think to exist . . . these consider, etc. This con- 
veniently gets rid of the Sekward word ‘principles,’ and 
gives the real sense. ‘ Everything and all in all’ may be τὸ 
πάντων κεφάλαιον : or we may use the milder phrase, περὶ 
λείστου ποιοῦνται. 

The whole will then be something of this kind: τοῖς δὲ 
θῶς καὶ φιλοσόφως πεπαιδευμένοις μεγάλα ταῦτα καὶ 
ανταχοῦ κρατοῦντα φαίνεται" καὶ ἅπερ ἐκεῖνοι οὐδὲ 
var νομίζουσιν, οὗτοι τὸ πάντων κεφάλαιον ἡγοῦνται. 


Magnanimity in politics is not seldom the truest wisdom : 
and a great empire and little minds go ill together. 

_ Here of course we must personalise. The commonest form 
of such a sentence would be: ‘In politics a man would be 
ἮΝ wise being magnanimous,’ πλεῖστ᾽ ἄν τις μι 


a Paine about ‘ going ill taeathor. Perhaps the best turn 
would pe: : ‘it belongs not to a narrow mind to order a great 
pire,’ or something of that ee 


: » ea be 
102 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. -. [XIV. _ 


The Greek will then be: ἐν yap τῷ πολιτεύεσθαι Eo? 
ὅτε πλεῖστά τις σωφρονεῖ μεγαλόψυχος ὦν, οὐδὲ φαύλης 
καὶ δικανικῆς διανοίας ἐστὶ μεγάλην ἀρχὴν διοικεῖν. 


4, If we are conscious of our situation, and glow with zeal to 
fill our place as becomes our station and ourselves, we 
ought to auspicate all our public proceedings on America 
with the old warning of the Church, Sursum corda. We 
ought to elevate our minds to the greatness of that trust 
to which the order of Providence has called us. 


The difficulty of the beginning comes from the repetition 
of the same idea—situation, place, station. Perhaps the best 
thing to do in Greek is to make the first one clear, and after- 
wards to give it very briefly: ‘If we know what a rule 
we hold, and desire to govern worthily of, ete. or ‘as 
befits such persons with such a charge.’ In what remains 
we have ideas very foreign to Greek, with which we must 
necessarily deal very freely, giving only the general effect, 
perhaps somewhat in this way: ‘as the priest, when begin- 
ning the rite, bids . . . so ought we, when we are consider- 
ing about America ...’ In the last sentence we see again 
the practised skill of the orator. ΤῸ make his point safe, he 
gives it a second time in an English shape: he translates the 
‘sursum corda’ by ‘we ought to elevate our minds. The 
best way to render the spirit in Greek would be not to 
repeat the phrase, but to add a jinal clause as follows: ‘in 
order that we may understand how great things the gods 
have intrusted to us.’ : pe 

The whole will then be: ὥστε εἰ ξύνισμεν ἑαυτοῖς ἐν οἵοις 
ἐσμέν καὶ ἐπιθυμοῦμεν οὕτω πολιτεύεσθαι ὥς προσήκει 
τοὺς τοιούτους ὄντας καὶ τοιαῦτα διοικοῦντας, δεῖ δήπου, 
ὥσπερ οἱ ἱερεῖς τελετῶν ἀρχόμενοι Καρδίαν ἐπαίρειν ἡ 
κελεύουσιν, οὕτω καὶ καὶ ἡμᾶς περὶ ᾿Αμερικῆς. βουλεύον-. 
τας ἐπαρθῆναι, ἵνα συνιῶμεν ὡς μέγαλα δὴ ταύτῃ τῇ 
πόλει οἱ θεοὶ ἐπέτρεψαν. 


΄ 


‘SENTIMENTAL’ POLITICS. 103 


δ. By adverting to the dignity of this high calling our ancestors 
_ have turned a savage wilderness into a glorious empire : 
and have made the most extensive and the only honourable 
conquests, not by destroying, but by promoting the wealth, 
ἊΝ the number, and the happiness of the human race. 

ἅ _ ‘Adverting to’ here is simply old English for ‘remembering,’ 
‘keeping in mind,’ μεμνημένος, μνημονεύων, ἐνθυμούμενος, 
‘a οἷο. ‘Dignity of this high calling’ is a mere repetition of the 
idea of the previous sentence, and in the Greek need not, I 
think, be repeated: we may simply say ‘such things,’ ‘ these 
things’: for ‘turned, we maysay ‘made out of.’ The rest is easy. 
_ The sentence will be: τοιαῦτα γὰρ ἐνθυμούμενοι οἱ 
πατέρες ἐξ ἐρήμου Kal ἀγρίας χώρας λαμπροτάτην ἀρχὴν 
ἀ ἀπειργάσαντο, καὶ μεγίστην καὶ μόνην εὐδόκιμον νίκην 
ἐ ἐνίκησαν ταύτην, οὐ διαφθείροντες ἀλλ’ αὐξάνοντες 
πάντων ἀνθρώπων πλοῦτον καὶ πλῆθος καὶ εὐδαιμονίαν. 
Note the emphatic and predicative position οὗ ταύτην. 


}. Let us get an American revenue as we have got an American 
empire. English privileges have made it all that it is: 
English privileges alone will make it all it can be. 


* 


_ The real connection of sentences is ‘the empire’: and the 
a elative clause must therefore, as often, come first. The last 
two antithetic clauses are thoroughly English in form: they 
4 need a good deal of recasting in Greek to make them idio- 
matic. The best thing to do is to make it all absolutely 
clear by adding a participial clause to the first sentence of 
4h uis kind, ‘ by giving them a share of our liberty’: then we 
can again express with great ease and simplicity the sense of 
ἕῳ last sentence by saying ‘for by what means it grew to 
this height, by that it will grow yet more. With these 
Ε΄. the whole becomes quite ES δοῦπος and the 
t piece will run as follows: ὥσπερ οὖν ἀρχὴν ἐκεῖ 
ησάμεθα οὕτω καὶ πρόσοδον δεῖ κτήσασθαι, τῆς ἐνθάδε 
υθερίας μεταδόντες" ἡ ἡ γὰρ ἐς τοσοῦτο ηὐξήθη, ταύτῃ 
μόνον οἷόν τε ἐστὶ καὶ ἐπὶ μεῖζον αὐξηθῆναι. 


Β΄. “: 


XV.—0’CONNELL—(Macavtar) 


1. With this judge, you have a verdict, and what have — 
‘you gained by it? Have you pacified Ireland? No 

doubt there is at this moment an apparent tranquillity: — 
but it is a tranquillity more alarming than turbulence. — 
2. The Irish will be quiet till you begin to put the sen- 

tence of imprisonment into execution, because feeling the — 
deepest interest in the fate of their persecuted tribune, 
they will do nothing that can be prejudicial to him. 
3. But will they be quiet when the door of a gaol has 
closed upon him? Is it possible to believe that an 
agitator, whom they adored while his agitation was a 
source of profit to him, will lose his hold on their affec- 
tions by being a martyr in what they consider as their — 
cause? 4. If I, who am strongly attached to the Union, 
who think Mr. O’Connell’s conduct highly reprehensible, 
cannot conscientiously say that he has had a fair trial; 
if the prosecutors themselves 816. forced to say that 
things have happened which have excited a prejudice 
against the verdict and the judgment; what must be the 
feelings of the people of Ireland, who believe not merely 
that he is guiltless, but that he is the best friend that 
they ever had? 5. He will no longer be able to harangue ~ 
them: but his wrongs will stir their blood more than his 
eloquence ever did: nor will he in confinement be able ~ 
to exercise that influence which has so often restrained 
them, even in their most excited mood, from ἘΤΟΒΘΡΟΙΟΝ ᾿ 


to acts of violence, 
104 


ap? 


O'CONNELL, ee 


1. With this judge, you have a verdict. And what have you 
_ gained by it? Have you pacified Ireland? No doubt 
there is at this moment an apparent tranquillity: but it is 
a tranquillity more alarming than turbulence. 

In the first sentence he has evidently been describing the 
unsatisfactory character of the judge: so that the verdict 
_ was robbed of most of its value. We had better therefore 
_ say, for ‘this, τοιοῦτος. For ‘you have a verdict, it is 
possible to translate strictly according to the sense, and say 
‘the man has been for you condemned ;’ but this rather loses 
the force of ‘you have,’ suggesting, as it does, that the govern- 
m ent had tried to get a verdict: and I should therefore 
prefer the other method, namely, to say boldly ‘you have 
condemned him.’ In the latter of the two clauses, ‘there is 
at this moment an apparent,’ etc., should of course be done 
personally: we must make ΤῚΝ δ: the subject of the sentence, 
eT ‘hen there is no further difficulty, and the sentence will run 
as follows: ἀλλὰ μέντοι τοιοῦτον ἔχοντες τὸν δικάστην 
κατεκρίνατε' καὶ τί πλέον ἄρα ἔχετε; δῶν ἐκείνους τῆς 
στάσεως ἐπαύσατε; φαίνονται μὲν δὴ ἐν τῷ παρόντι 
ἡσυχίαν ἔχειν, τοιαύτην γε μὴν ἣν φανερᾶς στάσεως 
μᾶλλον δεῖ φοβεῖσθαι. 


Note πλέον 2 ἔχειν for ‘advantage.’ ye μὴν, strong adversative. 
φοβεῖσθαι δεῖ, the personal way of doing ‘formidable.’ It would 
however be equally good to follow the English, and say, τοιαύτην 
γε μὴν ἥτις φανερᾶς στάσεως πολὺ δήπου φοβερωτέρα. 


a The Irish will be quiet till you begin to put the sentence of 
imprisonment into execution; because, feeling the deepest. 
interest in the fate of their persecuted tribune, they will 
do nothing that can be prejudicial to him. 

This sentence has a good deal of idiom in it. First, 

; ‘begin to put the sentence’ had best be done into Greek by 
saying, in greater detail, ‘Having condemned, also try to 
‘shut up, or something of that kind. Again, to ‘feel the 
deepest interest’ is another thoroughly English phrase: I 
think it will be enough to say ‘pity.’ For ‘ persecuted’ we 
a H 


ἃ 


106 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


moe 


must say ‘ suffering such things’: and, still more important, in — 


the Greek it must not be allowed to be an attribute, but must 
be given as an additional fact without the article. Again, 
‘that can be prejudicial to him’ is an example of the turn so 
common in English, where the expression is wanting in the 
precise sharpness of the Greek. We had better say ‘lest he 
suffer something worse.’ We shall then be able to render 2 
as follows: καὶ οὐδὲν ἴσως βίαιον δράσουσι μέχρι οὗ KaTa- 
γνόντες καὶ ἐς φυλακὴν ἀπάγειν πειρᾶσθε: τέως γὰρ 
οἰκτείροντες τοιαῦτα πάσχοντα τὸν εὐεργέτην εὐλαβοῦνται 
δὴ βιᾷ μὴ χρῆσθαι μὴ ἔτι κακίω πάθῃ. 

Note, τέως adds to the clearness by repeating (demonstrative) the 


idea of μέχρι οὗ (relative). βιᾷ μὴ χρῆσθαι κιτιλ.: the full sense of 
the English is expressly given in the Greek. 


3. But will they be quiet when the door of a gaol has closed 
upon him? Is it possible to believe that an agitator, 


whom they adored while his agitation was a source οὗ 
profit to him, will lose his hold on their affections by being 


a martyr in what they consider as their cause ? 


‘Door of a gaol,’ etc., will be more simply turned, ‘ be shut 


up within.’ For ‘agitator’ we will use the word δημηγορέω : 


but let it be specially noticed that it will be more idiomatic 


to use it not as a name, as in the English, but attach it par- 
ticipially, δημηγοροῦντας. ‘Lose his hold,’ ete, English 
artificial style: get down to the fact, and it becomes ‘that 
they will less love’ or ‘honour.’ Again, a ‘ martyr’ requires 
interpreting: ‘suffering for them’ is the simplest. ‘ What 
they consider’ can be sufficiently done by the dramatic 
particle. 

The Greek will then be: ἐπειδὰν δὲ ἅπαξ εἰρχθῆ, 


/ ” e / 9 \ / v4 
πότερον ETL ἡσυχάσουσιν ; apa δυνατὸν ἐλπίζειν, ὅντινα 
δημηγοροῦντα ὅτε ἑαυτῷ συνέφερεν ὅμως ἐτίμων, τοῦτον 


ὑπὲρ ἐκείνων δὴ ταλαυπωρούμενον ἧσσόν τι τιμήσειν ; 


Notice the position of ὅντινα : the relative idea first, as usual in 
rhetorical Greek. : 


γ 


OCONNELL. . 107 


4, 4. If I, who am strongly attached to the union, who think Mr. 
| O'Connell’s conduct highly reprehensible, cannot conscien- 
: tiously say he has had a fair trial; if the prosecutors 

themselves are forced to say that things have happened 
___which have excited a prejudice against the verdict and the 
‘judgment ; what must be the feelings of the people of Ire- 
᾿ς land, who believe not merely that he is guiltless, but that 
he is the best friend that they ever had ? 


In the general structure there is no difficulty; it is very 
Ἵ Tike Greek: ‘IfI,onthe onehand. . . those who prosecuted 
on the other . . . what do you think that the people .. ’ 
_ The real crux is with the phrases. First ‘strongly 
ee to the union’ is, of course, very allusive, and in 
Greek must be fully explained: perhaps better say, ‘who am 
“very anxious that the Irish should not become autonomous’; 
or “who would choose before much that...’ ‘ Cannot con- 
‘scientiously say that’ may be more shat done by ‘ neces- 
“sarily confess.’ Again, ‘things have happened which have 
excited’ is a very clumsy sentence, and we had better go by 
the sense only: it might do to say ‘people are by some 
chance angry.’ But as the English implies that the anger is 
na tural, perhaps we had better say ‘that some people are 
naturally discontented with the...’ As to the phrases 
‘verdict’ and ‘ judgment,’ they may be done literally, or, pos- 
κε, ibly better, personally : ‘those who have thus judged him, 
‘and assessed such a sentence.’ Lastly, in the principal 
4 ause, we have a very common English idiom, ‘ the feelings,’ 
meaning ‘the angry feelings’: it is safer to interpret. For 
q yest friend,’ it is perhaps as well to add a caution: the 
{ Greek word φίλος, φίλτατος rather implies a person whom 
you love: the English word ‘friend’ here means, as often, a 

person who has done you a service ; and it is necessary to make 


“The whole will then be: εἰ yap ἐγὼ μὲν περὶ πολλοῦ 
ποιούμενος ἐκείνους μήποτε αὐτονόμους γενέσθαι, Kal τῷ 


5 
"ἢ 
a 
ἴῳ 


108 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


Κλέωνι τούτῳ πολλὰ μεμφόμενος, ὅμως κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην 
ὁμολογῷ ἀδίκως κατακεκρίσθαι, αὐτοὶ δὲ οἱ ἐγκαλέσαντες. 
τοιαῦτά φασι συμβῆναι ὥστε εἰκότως τινας καὶ τοῖς 
δικασταῖς καὶ τῷ ζημίαν τάξαντι χαλεπαίνειν, πῶς οἴεσθε. 
ἀγανακτεῖν τοὺς αὐτόθεν, οἵτινες οὐκ ἀναίτιον μόνον 
ἐκεῖνον ἡγοῦνται ἀλλὰ πάντων μᾶλλον ἑαυτῶν εὐεργέτην ; 


5. He will no longer be able to harangue them; but his wrongs 
will stir their blood more than his eloquence ever did: nor 
will he in confinement be able to exercise that influence 
which has so often restrained them, even in their most 
excited mood, from proceeding to acts of violence, 

The second clause about ‘ his wrongs stirring their blood’ 
will have to be made personal, of course: nor is there any 
difficulty in doing it so, except the difficulty of keeping it 
sufficiently terse. ‘To excite’ is τυράσσω, ὁρμάω, ἐξορίνω. 
For ‘ stir their blood’ and ‘ confinement’ we shall naturally get 
simpler equivalents. There will then be no further difficulty. 

The Greek of the whole will be: καὶ δημηγοροῦντος μὲν 
οὐκέτι ἔσται ἀκούειν: εἰδότες δὲ οἷα πάσχει πολὺ πλείονα 
ὀργὴν ἕξουσιν ἢ τῶν λόγων τότε ἀκροώμενοι" ὁ δὲ ἐν 
φυλακῇ ὧν οὐκέτι δὴ καθέξει, ὡς πολλάκις ἤδη καὶ σφόδρα 
ὁρμωμένους κατέσχεν, μὴ ἐς τὸ βιαιότερον τραπέσθαι. 

The first of these clauses is a good example of the constant 
tendency in English to artificialise the arrangement of the 
acts and subjects: ‘ his wrongs will stir their blood’ makes the 
action centre imaginatively round the man in prison, when 
the real thing described is the feelings of the people outside. 
The Greek reverts to the strict reality. 

In the last clause it is in the English the ‘ influence’ which 
restrains: in the Greek, of course, it must be the ‘man.’ And 
observe that I use μὴ, and not μὴ ov, as the last clause 
follows close on the positive κατέσχεν, and is further 
removed from the negative οὐκέτι δὴ καθέξει. 


7 7 ew ‘me 
Pee tee ae wr 
‘ - th. “ δ᾿ a ν s ' 


XVI.—THE DUKE OF GRAFTON—(Junivs). 


_ 1. You have publicly declared, even after your resig- 
nation, that you approved of their measures, and δ τιον 
their characters—particularly that of the Earl of Sand- 
wich. What a pity it is that with all this approbation 
you should think it necessary to separate yourself from 
“such amiable companions ! 2. You forget, my lord, that 


“desert, you are publicly opposing your conduct to your 
‘opinions, and depriving yourself of the only plausible 
pretence you had for leaving your Sovereign overwhelmed ~ 
“with distress: I call it plausible, for in truth there is no 
‘reason whatsoever, less than the frowns of your master, 
that could justify a man of spirit for abandoning his post 
at a moment so critical and important. 3. It is in vain 
to evade the question. If you will not speak out, the 
public have a right to judge from appearances. We are 
authorised to conclude that you either differed from your 
colleagues, whose measures you still affect to defend, or 
that you thought the administration of the King’s affairs 
no longer tenable. 4. You are at liberty to choose 
hb erect the hypocrite and the coward. Your best friends 
are in doubt which way they shall incline. Your country 
; ites the characters, and gives you credit for them both. 
For my own part, I see ΕΣ inconsistent in your 
conduct. You began by betraying the people, you con- 
clude with betraying the King. 
— 109 


while you are lavish in the praise of men whom you — 


[το LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


1. You have publicly declared, even after your resignation, that 
you approved of their measures, and admired their 
characters—particularly that of the Earl of Sandwich. 
What a pity it is that with all this approbation you should 
think it necessary to separate yourself from such amiable 
companions ! 


In the structure of the first clause there is one little point 
which we often have to notice, namely, that the English uses — 
two verbs—‘ Approved of their measures, and admired their — 
characters, —whereas the Greek would more likely put one 
verb to the front, and say, ‘Praised them, both what they 
have counselled, and what they themselves were in virtue,’ 
or something of that sort. ‘Resignation’ must of course be 
done by a verb, and the vaguer English must be made 
precise. Thus we shall BAY: ‘After you ceased to hold 
office, ἐπειδὴ τῆς ἀρχῆς ἐπαύσω, or ἐπειδὴ τὴν ἀρχῆι 
ἀπέλιπες. 

The scathing irony given in the sentence, ‘ particularly 
that of the Earl of Sandwich ’—the most notorious profligate 
even in the Duke of Grafton’s ministry—must be somehow 
rendered either by inserting ‘I think,’ or some dramatic — 
particle like δὴ or δήπου. For ‘ what a pity it is,’ say δεινὸν 
ποιεῖσθαι εἰ, or θαυμάζω εἰ. ‘With all this approbation’ 
will be naturally in Greek turned with a participle, with or 
without ‘although.’ 

‘Such amiable compan ney may be done literally, οὕτω 
φιλανθρώπων, or ἐπιεικῶν ἀνδρῶν, or by the simple use 
of the convenient word τοιοῦτος. 

The whole will then be: ἐκείνους δὲ φανερῶς ἐπήνεσας, 
καὶ ἐπειδὴ τῆς ἀρχῆς ἐπαύσω, ὡς συμφέροντά τε Bov- 
λεύοντας καὶ αὐτοὺς σπουδαίους ὄντας" καὶ οὐχ ἥκιστα, 
οἶμαι, τὸν Αἰσχίνην. ἐγὼ δὲ δεινὸν ποιοῦμαι εἰ cots 
ἐπαινῶν ἀφεστάναι δεῖν Gov τῶν τοιούτων. 


THE DUKE OF GRAFTON. TIL - 


2. You forget, my lord, that while you are lavish in the praise 
of men whom you desert, you are publicly opposing your 
conduct to your opinions, and depriving yourself of the 
only plausible pretence you had for leaving your Sovereign 
overwhelmed with distress: I call it plausible, for in truth 
there is no reason whatsoever, less than the frowns of your 
master, that could justify a man of spirit for abandoning 
_ his post at a moment so critical and important. 


ἣν 


 ‘Tayvish in the praise’ may be done simply by one word— 
“latter, κολακεύω. ‘You are publicly opposing’ is a little 
+00 artificial, in the way in which the idea is presented, for 
Greek: it is better to say, ‘You prove to be opposed.’ 
‘Conduct’ and ‘opinions’ may be either done by verbs— 
+ what you think’ and ‘what you do’: or more simply by 
‘deeds’ and ‘thoughts’: either ἃ ἐνθυμεῖ οἷς ἔδρασας évayTia, - 
r ἔργα and γνώμη, etc. ‘The only plausible pretence you 
had’ is one of those clauses which in Greek is the same in 
ΟΝ but different in order: the Greeks would say, 
‘which alone you had plausible pretext,’ ἣν μόνην εἶχες 
μετρίαν or (εὐπρεπῆ) πρόφασιν : and moreover the relative 
clause, as so often, would come first, the principal verb, 
‘deprive,’ being the end of the sentence. ‘ For leaving,’ after 
‘pretence, will be either ὥστε or Sv ἥντινα, or even might 
be done with τοῦ and the infinitive. 
In the second half of this long sentence the main thing to 
be observed is the real antithesis, which in the English is a 
1 ittle concealed by the arrangement of the sentence. The 
real antithesis is between 0 idea of ‘plausible pretence’ 
a the idea of ‘just reason’: but the latter is expanded 
into the longer phrase, ‘ There is no reason that could justify.’ 
We must restore this in the Greek: ‘ Moderate pretext, I say: 
for r just reason you cannot mention,’ etc. ‘The frowns of 
your master’ is a highly metaphorical turn of phrase, and 
‘must naturally be translated pecoraing to the sense: ‘ Unless” 
the King had quarrelled with you,’ or ‘unless the King had 


Ἂ 
᾿ἃ 


ee ea 
Me 


112 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. | [xVin- 


dismissed you in anger.’ A little further down the meta- 
phorical expression ‘abandoning his post’ may be done 
literally : it is a common Greek metaphor; and in rhetoric 
metaphors are much more allowed than in ordinary narrative. 
Or if it is preferred to give the sense, we may say, ‘to 
abandon the King.’ Lastly, ‘critical and important’ is only 
the common repetition of this rather verbose style: it will be 
quite enough to say merely, ‘so great a crisis’: using the 
convenient words τοσοῦτος or τοιοῦτος καιρός. 

The whole sentence will then run somewhat as follows: 
ἐπελάθου γάρ, ὦνθρωπε, ὅτι τῷ τούτους κολακεύειν OVS 
ἀπέλιπες ἐναντία δηλοῖς ὄντα TA ἔργα τῇ γνώμῃ, καὶ οὕτω 
ἣν μόνην εἶχες εὐπρεπῆ πρόφασιν ὥστε βασιλέα ταλαι- 
πωρούμενον προδοῦναι, ταύτην αὐτὸς ἀφεῖλες" καὶ εὐπρεπῆ 
λέγω πρόφασιν! αἰτίαν γὰρ δικαίαν οὐδεμίαν ἂν εἴποι 
οὐδείς, ὅστις μὴ δειλός ἐστι καὶ κακὸς, OU ἥντινα ἐν καιρῷ 
τοσούτῳ τὴν τάξιν δεῖ ἀπολιπεῖν, πλὴν εἰ ὁ βασιλεὺς 
δυσχεραίνων ἀπήλασεν. 


3. It is in vain to evade the question. If you will not speak 
out, the public have a right to judge from appearances. 
We are authorised to conclude that you either differed from 
your colleagues, whose measures you still affect to defend, 
or that you thought the administration of the King’s affairs 
no longer tenable. 


The first difficulty is with the thoroughly idiomatic expres- 
sion, ‘It is in vain to evade.’ The Greeks would not say 
μάταιόν ἐστι with infinitive ; they would more likely make 
it personal, and say ‘You are not benefited, or ‘ You vainly 
try’: or perhaps even more idiomatically still, ‘Don’t try 

’ For ‘evade the question’ many different phrases might 
be found; I should suggest. ‘when asked have recourse to 
shifts,’ ἐρωτώμενος és προφάσεις καταφεύγειν. The public 
will be ‘we, or ‘all men,’ or ‘the rest of us, ete. For 
‘appearances’ one might say simply ‘from what we see,’ or 


ἃ 


THE DUKE OF GRAFTON. . 113 


“perhaps it would do to use the more convenient phrase ‘to 
guess from what was likely,’ which is after all more close to 
_ what the writer really means. In the next clause, the words 
with which it opens, ‘We are authorised to conclude,’ are 
3 only a stately repetition of the foregoing words, ‘ We have a 
right to judge,’ a repetition which we shall certainly not 
make in Greek. We may either say, ‘And judging so, you 
will appear ..., or ‘And the probability is that you either 
: ...,’ or simply omit it, continue the sentence, and begin 
with τῷ conjunction ‘that.’ ‘Differed from’ will be ‘to | 
oppose, ἐναντιοῦσθαι. ‘Colleagues’ will be σύμβουλοι. 
In the last clause there is a certain ambiguity, namely, as to 
what he means by calling the administration of the King’s 
affairs ‘no longer tenable.’ ‘The context seems to show that 
“he means ‘it is no longer safe for you to eet matters.’ 
We may therefore turn it as follows: οὐκέτι ἀσφαλὲς 
x νομίζων Ta πράγματα διοικεῖν. Or we might put it as 
“incapacity: οὐκέτι οἷός τ᾽ εἶναι νομίζων τὰ τῆς πόλεως 
διοικεῖν. 

_ The whole bit will then be somewhat of this sort: μηδὲ 
a ἐρωτώμενος ἐς προφάσεις καταφύγῃς" εἰ γὰρ μὴ ἐθέλεις 
: ἀποκρίνασθαι δίκαιοί ἐσμεν ἐκ τοῦ εἰκότος λογίσασθαι: 
οὕτω δὲ λογιξομένοις φανήσει ἢ τοῖς συμβούλοις τότε 
ἐναντιούμενος οὺς νῦν προσποιεῖ ἐπαινεῖν, ἢ οὐκέτι 

ἀσφαλὲς νομίζων τοῖς πράγμασιν ἐπιχειρεῖν. 


4 ee are at liberty to choose between the hypocrite and the 
, coward. Your best friends are in doubt which way they 
shall incline. Your country unites the characters, and 
gives you credit for them both. For my own part, I see 
nothing inconsistent in your conduct. You began by 
betraying the people, you conclude with betraying the King. 


The first clause would in Greek be made more personal : 
‘You may choose whether you prefer to be false,’ ete. In 
the second clause ‘which way they shall incline’ would be 


& 
a 


ει 
bs ὰ 


precise sine the English. ἢ Unies the characte is ὍΝ 
Re panei, and in Greek ye probably be done by a = p 


haps to say that the antithesis ‘ you began . . . you cone. 
would not be turned by two verbs as in the English, but 
a participle and a verb. 
ae ‘We shall then have: ὧν ὁπότερον ἂν θέλῃς enc 
Be τς ψρευδὴς εἶναι ἢ δειλός: Kal ἀμφισβητοῦσι μὲν οἱ γνώ͵ 
ο΄ πότερον σοῦ καταγνῶσιν' ἡ δὲ πόλις ἀμφότερα σ 


ΟΥ̓ γάρ. 


XVII.—THE DOG—(HE tps). 


1. A MAN and a dog, they say, were walking along a 
straight road chatting pleasantly together. Yes, said 
man, you certainly are a very clever creature. You 
ke good use of your nose, and your eyes, and your. 
What a pity it is you have not hands like we have! 
. Oh! said the dog, you don’t know then that we once © 
had hands like yours, and how fortunate we were to get 
ἐ dofthem? You see even now some of us attended by 
igners with musical instruments, who walk upright 
gain many drachms. 3, But this is how we came 
to lose our hands. Artemis, pleased with our skill in 
hunting, asked us what boon she should pray Zeus to 
sive us. 4. We took some time to think: some were 
asking that men should not be suffered to pick the 
es quite so clean: others that it should not be lawful 
hares and rabbits to run so fast: others that men 
should not choose such mean and foolish names for us. | 
5. But a prudent old dog said, Zeus is wiser than we are: 
let us ask him to take away from us whatever is most 
angerous. Then suddenly our hands became paws, and 
ceforth we went upon four legs. 6, Many of us 
mbled: some even threatened Zeus to believe no more 
im: but the god replied that he had done the best 
If we had kept our hands we might in time have 
de as bad a use of them as men, and become as dis- 
est and wicked as they were. 


116 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. [ΧΡ 


1, A man and a dog, they say, were walking along a straight — 
road chatting pleasantly together. Yes, said the man, you 
certainly are a very clever creature. You make good use 
of your nose, and your eyes, and your ears. What a pity 
it is you have not hands like we have! 


This story being told for a satirical purpose, should be 
done into the playful style of the anecdotes which Socrates 
tells in Plato. This is a style at once easy and finished, and — 
exceedingly humorous: and it is hard enough to imitate at 
all successfully, and perhaps still harder to lay down any 
rules or hints for imitating it. One may, however, say q 
generally, that it is a sort of ideal and highly polished con- _ 
versation, fiowing and rather diffuse, and easy, natural in its τ 
sequences, without any of the balance or periodic character — 
of the rhetorical prose, and at the same time highly dramatic 
and vivacious. It will thus show the delicacies of Greek — 
speech even more fully than usual: understatements, innuen- — 
does, suggestions, optatives with ἂν for definite futures or 
presents: the habit of speaking of things as appearing to be, _ 
in danger of being, supposed to be, instead of saying plainly q 
they are: plenty of dramatic particles, mockery of all sorts, — 
—mock simplicity, mock poetry, mock pathos, mock elegance, 
mock politeness, mock gravity, even mock mockery. Some Ἢ 
of these marks of the Platonic style of course depend on the — 
matter of the piece, over which, as we are translating, we 
naturally have no control. But some also depend on the ~ 
manner of presentment of the idea, and if the English be an ne 
appropriate piece may be aptly brought in. : 

In the first few clauses of the present piece there is little — 
or nothing to alter in the structure, all being so exceedingly 
simple ; but we may note one or two points which make the 
story sound a little more dramatic and amusing. Thus in — 
the second sentence, ‘yes’ is not the answer to a question, 
and a Greek would say, ‘and by Zeus,’ or something of that 


THE DOG. 117 


kind. Again, for ‘very clever creature’ we may use the 
idiom θαυμασίως ὡς σοφός. For to ‘make good use of, 
_ the Greeks would probably say, ‘know well how to use,’ or 
something like that, εὖ ἐπίστασθαι χρῆσθαι. In the last 
clause, for ‘what a pity it is, ete, we might use a great 
δ variety of turns: θαυμάζω γὰρ εἰ μή . . ., οἰκτρὸς δὴ εἶ 
ὅστις οὐκ ἔχεις. . ., δεινὰ δοκεῖς πεπονθέναι ὅτι οὐκ 
eyes... , 
_ We shall then have for the whole of the first section: 
φασὶ yap ἄνθρωπόν ποτε καὶ Kiva κατ᾽ ὀρθὴν ὁδὸν ἰέναι 
ἡδέως διαλεγομένους. καὶ νὴ Δία, εἰπεῖν τὸν ἄνθρωπον, 
θαυμασίως ὡς σοφὸν et θηρίον, ὅστις τῇ TE ῥινὶ εὖ ἐπί- 
᾿ στάσαι χρῆσθαι καὶ τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν: ὥστε 
δεινὰ δὴ δοκεῖς πεπονθέναι ὅτι οὐ χεῖρας ἔχεις οἵαςπερ 
᾿ ἡμεῖς. 


_ Note εἰπεῖν τὸν ἄνθρωπον : the oratio obliqua is kept up from φασὶ, 


_ to show in a lively and natural way that it is all part of the story. 
Α 


_ 2. Oh! said the dog, you don’t know then that we once had 
_ hands like yours, and how fortunate we were to get rid of 
them? You see even now some of us attended by foreigners 
with musical instruments, who walk upright and gain many 
drachms. 


Just as in the last sentence, we had better keep up all 
through the piece the narrative Oratio Obliqua wherever we 
_ have the connecting bits between the speeches. Accordingly, 
we shall begin with τὸν δὲ κύνα φάναι. ‘How fortunate’ 
will be by Greek idiom of@ τινὶ τύχῃ, etc. ‘Even now’ is 
a little more humorous if slightly emphasised in the Greek 
Mashion : ἔτι yap Kal νῦν ἔστιν ods... It heightens the 
: ΗΝ of treating the barrel-organ dogs as a survival of the 
old times when all had hands. 

Again, ‘attended by foreigners with musical instruments 
...) where the men are treated as hangers-on of the dog, 
is gel given in Greek by saying, ‘with strangers and 


118 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


The whole will then be: τὸν δὲ κύνα, Οὐ γὰρ οἶσθα, 
; φάναι, OTL εἴχομέν ποτε χεῖρας ὥσπερ ὑμεῖς, οὐδ᾽ οἵᾳ τιν — 
τύχῃ ἀπηλλάγημεν; ἔτι γὰρ καὶ νῦν ἔστιν ods ἴδοις ἂν a 
ἡμῶν μετὰ ξένων καὶ κιθαρῶν πλανωμένους καὶ ὀρθοὺς Β, 
ἑστῶτας, ὥστε πολλὰς δραχμὰς κερδαίνειν. 


3. But this is how we came to lose our hands. Artemis, 
pleased with our skill in hunting, asked us what boon she 
should pray Zeus to give us. 


‘This,’ meaning ‘the following,’ must be τοιόςδε, and may — 
come last word. ‘Pleased with our skill’ will naturally be 
‘pleased with us as skilled.’ There is nothing else in this — 
short clause, and the Greek may run: τὰς δὲ χεῖρας ἀπεβά- 
λομεν τρόπῳ ToL@de: ἡ γὰρ ΓΆρτεμις ἡδομένη ἡμῖν ὡς 
ἐμπείροις οὖσι τῆς θήρας ἐπήρετο ποῖον ἄρα δῶρον ἡμῖν 
παρὰ τοῦ Διὸς αἰτήσειεν. 


4, We took some time to think: some were for asking that men ~ 
should not be suffered to pick the bones quite so clean: 
others that it should not be lawful to hares and rabbits to — 
run so fast: others that men should not choose such mean 
and foolish names for us. 


The first clause will be more humorously grave if we use a 
the word σκοπεῖν for ‘think’: it has an association of gravity — 


from being regularly used for philosophical inquiry, and we a 
may perhaps add the idiomatic turn ἄλλοι ἄλλα αἱρούμενοι, — 

Ἷ τῆ Σ i ΓΝ 
which gives precision to the ἐσκοποῦμεν. ‘ Were for ask- — 


ing’ may be either literally, ‘wished to ask,’ or the imperfect, — 
or simply, ἔδοξε or ἐδόκει. For the expression about ‘pick- 
ing the bones’ we may simply say, ‘scrape the meat off the — 
bones, τῶν ὀστῶν τὰ κρέα ἀποκνᾶν. For ‘so clean’ we Ἔ 
must use greater precision, and say ‘carefully, ἐπιμελῶς. 
Hares are λαγώς, plural λαγῴ : and as there is no classical 
Greek word for ‘rabbit,’ we may use the highly convenient — ᾿ 


a THE DOG. 119 


words τοὺς τοιούτους, or τοιαῦτα θηρία. For the phrases 
awful,’ ‘suffered,’ ‘should not,’ which recur here, we should 
in Greek vary the idiom and say, μὴ ἐξεῖναι, νόμον εἶναι, 
ἀπειπεῖν, κελεῦσαι, παῦσαι, or numerous other expressions 
_ which give the sense. 

x. a “ n 

_ Then the whole of 4 may be thus translated: ἡμεῖς δὲ 
τ ys NS 9 a » 5 ς ΄ a \ 
τέως μὲν ἐσκοποῦμεν, ἄλλοι ἄλλα αἱρούμενοι" τοῖς MEV 
γὰρ ἐδόκει μὴ ἐξεῖναι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ κρέα τῶν ὀστῶν 
οὕτως ἐπιμελῶς ἀποκνᾶν, τοῖς δὲ βραδυτέρους δεῖν γενέσθαι 
ποὺς λαγώς τε καὶ τοὺς τοιούτους, τοῖς δὲ παῦσαι τοὺς 
᾿ 3 ΄ 7 n e n Ves , / > / 

é ἀνθρώπους μηκέτι φαῦλα ἡμῖν καὶ ἀνόητα θέσθαι ὀνόματα. 


Bae 


Note: τέως μὲν is idiomatic; it prepares for the decisive speech of 
; _ the old dog afterwards. 


Be 


δ. But a prudent old dog said, Zeus is wiser than we are: let 
us ask him to take away from us whatever is most danger- 
ous. Then suddenly our hands became paws, and hence- 
forth we went upon four legs. 


The chief thing to note is that the two clauses about Zeus 
Seronld certainly in Greek—as one of them is the reason of 
the other—become one clause, the clause which gives the 
‘reason being subordinate to the main one. Again, ‘a prudent 
old dog’ is rather an English arrangement, the qualities being 
made part of the attribute to the substantive. In Greek we — 
ΓῈ enerally have a participial clause added, ‘being old and 
"prudent. Further, in the sentence ‘ our hands became paws,’ 
the Greek would most likely express it personally as usual: 
‘we had paws on,’ ἀμφεβεβλήμεθα πόδας. Also the clause, 
‘and henceforth, etc., being the result of the one before, 
would be turned as a consecutive sentence. The rest is 
easy, and we shall have the Greek as follows: τέλος δὲ 
γών τις, γέρων ὧν καὶ ξυνετός, τὸν Ala ἠξίου αἰτεῖσθαι 
ς σοφώτερον ὄντα τῶν κυνῶν, ὅ, TL ἂν σφαλερώτατον 


120 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. [XVII 


5 = >’ a / \ > \ / > \ lal 
ἔχωμεν τοῦτο ἀφελεῖν. τότε δὲ εὐθὺς πόδας ἀντὶ χειρῶν 
ἀμφεβεβλήμεθα ὥστε τὸ λοιπὸν τετράποδες εἶναι. 

Note (1) the convenient word ἀξιόω ‘to call upon,’ ‘urge’ ;—(2) the | 
relative sentence ὅ,τι dy . . . ἔχωμεν put before the antecedent τοῦτο ; 


—(3) the nominative attraction rerpdmodes (after ὥστε) referring to 
the subject of the main verb. 


6. Many of us grumbled: some even threatened Zeus to believe 
no more in him: but the god replied that he had done the 
best for us. If we had kept our hands we might in time 
have made as bad a use of them as men, and become as 
dishonest and wicked as they were. 


The first clause is improved perhaps if we begin with the 
natural particle ‘nevertheless, οὐ μὴν ἀλλά. The comic 
threat to Zeus is also made more absurd if we insert the 
peculiar particle of formal and strong asseveration, ἢ μήν. 
Again, the tale is made a little clearer if, instead of saying 
merely ‘replied,’ we say, what the story practically implies, 
‘consoled them by saying, παρεμυθεῖτο φάσκων. Finally, 
the two verbs ‘made as bad a use, and ‘become, will 
naturally fall in Greek into one sentence, and be, one ἃ 
participle and the other a verb. 

Then the whole of 6 will be somewhat as follows: od μὴν 
ἀλλὰ ἐσχετλίαζόν τινες, καὶ εἰσὶν οἱ καὶ ἤἠπείλουν TO Διὶ 
ἢ μὴν μηκέτι νομιεῖν: ὁ δὲ παρεμυθεῖτο ἄριστα φάσκων 
βεβουλεῦσθαι" εἰ γὰρ χεῖρας ἔτι εἴχομεν, τελευτῶντας ἂν 
ὥσπερ οἱ | ἄνθρωποι καταχρωμένους οὐδὲν ἧσσον ἂν ἀδίκους 
καὶ μιαροὺς γενέσθαι. 

Note (1) idiom of τελευτῶν for ‘in time,’ ‘at last’ ;---([2) idiom of 
using nom. ἄνθρωποι after ὥσπερ where the thing compared is never- 
theless accusative (cf. πόλιν δημοκρατουμένην ὥσπερ καὶ avToi— 


Thucyd.): the double ἂν where the conditional clause is lengthy, to 
keep the conditional character well before the reader. 


ΝΥ ee eee ees ee ee a Ὁ 
wit Cot Ni BS ee : ν 
eae eee Ἢ i 
Ps ὌΝ 


XVIII.—THE CAPTAIN AND THE PRIEST. 


1. ‘Bur this is the difficulty I find,’ said the cantar to. 

‘the priest, ‘how it is that you, educated people that you 

are, can believe such monstrous absurdities.’ 

2 2. ‘Have you, replied the priest, ‘ever heard of such a 
thing as faith ?’ | 

a ry a time, but I prefer experience.’ 

Ε: ‘Nay,’ said the other, ‘have you ever been in these seas 

‘before τ᾽ ἷ 

‘Never.’ 


‘I’ve got the best Admiralty charts,’ said the captain, 
‘and my own eyes into the bargain.’ 

a 9. ‘You have had no experience of these latitudes, or © 
of the charts describing them, and yet you venture your 
very life upon them. What is this but faith ?’ 

_ 4, ‘Let me ask a question, too. You know nothing 
about the seaworthiness of this craft, or the ability of her 
master. Why, you might have come aboard a regular 
pirate, for anything you know. When I come to think 
of it, I quite wonder at your rashness.’ 

 §, ‘Oh, with regard to that,’ said the priest, laughing, 
‘I saw you had got safe so far, and so must be a pretty 
good sailor. And I have seen too many ships not to know 
when they are all right. 

6, ‘There, now, eoremed the captain, in a tone of 
mock disappointment, ‘I was going to give you credit for 
bh, and I find it’s only experience after all,’ 


oar? 
I 


: 3 ‘Then, what guide have you to keep you clear of reefs?) Ὁ Ὁ 


Me 


122 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. vii | 


1. ‘But this is the difficulty I find,’ said the captain to the 
priest, ‘how it is that you, educated people that you are, — 
can believe such monstrous absurdities.’ 


We had better in this piece, where the conversation does 
not proceed as in a play, but is reported as in a story, follow 
those Platonic dialogues where the talk is similarly reported. 
The constantly recurring words, ‘he said,’ ‘ said the other, 
‘the captain replied,’ etc., are put in just here and there 
where it is better or clearer for the sense. Remember that 
the Greek allows the variety of using the older forms 7 δ᾽ 
ὅς, ὃς δ᾽ ἔφη, for ‘he said,’ ‘said he.’ In the first clause we © 
had better put ‘priest’ into the vocative, ὦ éeped, after the 
Greek fashion, and make it part of the captain’s address. . 
‘Is my difficulty,’ of course, will be personal, as usual: τοῦτ᾽ 
ἀμηχανῶ, or ἀπορῶ. For ‘educated people,’ we may use the 
idiomatic turn ed ἔχειν παιδείας. ‘ Monstrous absurdities” 
will naturally be two adjectives, according to the common 
idiom: ‘ monstrous and absurd things,’ ἄτοπα καὶ θαυμάσια. 

The whole will then be as follows: περὶ δὲ τούτου, ἔφη 
ὁ ναύκληρος, ὦ ἱερεῦ, ἀμηχάνως ἔχω, πῶς ἄρα ὑμεῖς, ev 
ἔχοντες παιδείας, οὕτω θαυμάσια καὶ ἄτοπα ἀποδέχεσθε. 


Note (1) ἄρα dramatic, as so often ;—(2) ἀποδέχεσθαι idiomatic, for 
‘to accept a statement from another.’ 


2. ‘ Have you,’ replied the priest, ‘ever heard of such a thing 
as faith 1 

‘Many a time, but I prefer experience.’ 

‘Nay,’ said the other, ‘have you ever been in these seas 
before 1 . 

‘ Never.’ 

‘Then, what guide have you to keep you clear of reefs? 

‘I’ve got the best Admiralty charts,’ said the captain, ‘and 
my own eyes into the bargain.’ 


In the first question, perhaps, it is as well to put ‘faith’ 
‘strongly to the front, and say, ‘have you ever heard about | 


-. 


XVIII] IHE CAPTAIN AND THE PRIEST, 123 
faith that here is,’ etc... . In the next speech, it would 
be rather idiomatic to say, ‘and also about experience which 
is better.” ‘In these seas’ may be simply ταύτῃ. For 
‘guide’ we may use not ἡγεμών, which would be a person, but 
‘some such phrase as ‘sign of the voyage,’ τεκμήριον τοῦ πλοῦ, 
or simply ὠφέλεια. For ‘ Admiralty charts,’ we might say, 
‘the charts of the Trierarchs,’ or simply ‘the charts from 
home, ἡ δέλτος ἡ τῶν τριηράρχων, or ἡ οἴκοθεν. 
The most idiomatic phrase is ‘and my own eyes into the 
_ bargain.” It would, perhaps, be possible to translate ‘my 
own eyes’ literally ὄμματα, or ὀφθαλμοί, but it would 
doubtless sound more natural to make the clause participial, 
and say, ‘myself,’ too, not being blind, or something like 
that: καὶ αὐτὸς οὐ τυφλὸς ὦν. 
Then the whole of 2 will run as follows : 
0 δὲ ἱερεύς, Οὐ yap ἀκήκοας, ἔφη, THY πίστιν, ὡς ἔστι 
τε; 
Πολλάκις, ἢ δ᾽ ὅς: καὶ γὰρ τὴν ἐμπειρίαν, πολὺ ἀμείνω. 
οὖσαν. 
᾿Αλλὰ μήν, ἔφη, ἔστιν ὅτε ἤδη ταύτη ἐπλευσας ; 
Οὔπω. 
Ποίαν οὖν ὠφέλειαν ἔχεις ὥστε μὴ “τέτραις ἐμπεσεῖν; 
Δέλτον ἔχω, ἢ δ᾽ ὃς ὁ ναύκληρος, τὴν τῶν τριηράρχων 
ἡ πάντα ἐγγέγραπται, οὐδ᾽ αὐτὸς δὴ τυφλὸς ὦν. . 


ΝΥ πΎ ς᾿: 


be) Ri eed 2 


dé Ad ae td Pee νῸ 
— . 


et ae Lee Pe Ἄν ὦ ~ lw 


Note (1) the particles ;—(2) the carrying on of the construction in 
dialogue, e.g. καὶ yap τὴν ἐμπειρίαν, scil. ἀκήκοα. 


_ 3. ‘You have had no experience of these latitudes, or of the 
charts describing them, and yet you venture your very life 
upon them. What is this but faith?’ 


There is very little which requires notice here. To ‘ ven- 
ture your life’ is περὶ ψυχῆς, or περὶ κεφαλῆς κινδυνεύειν. 
In the last little clause, note the idiom τί ἄλλο ἢ πιστεύεις, 
__ where there is no verb with τί ἄλλο, 


- he 5 


ὦ 


124 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. [XVIII 


The sentence will then be: οὔκουν ἔμπειρος av (ἔφη ὁ 
i Ψ bd a f- 7] LA a . UA ia 
ἱερεύς) οὔτε τῆς ταύτῃ θαλάσσης οὔτε τῆς δέλτου ὅμως 
ταύτην ἔχων καὶ περὶ ψυχῆς πλεῖς κινδυνεύων" τί γὰρ 
ἄλλο ἢ πιστεύεις : 


4, ‘Let me ask a question, too. You know nothing about the 
seaworthiness of this craft, or the ability of her master. 
Why, you might have come aboard a. regular pirate, for 
anything you know, when I come to think of it. I quite 
wonder at your rashness.’ | 


The first clause may be done literally: or we may use the 
rather more common form of expression: ‘ you in your turn 
answer, καὶ ov ἐν μέρει atroxpivov. Next we notice that 
the speaker, after asking leave to put a question, does not 
put it strictly as a question, but merely expresses his sur- 
prise. In Greek we had better not allow this irregularity : 
but, having asked the man to answer, put the rest as a ques- 
tion. Perhaps something of this kind: ‘how you dared to 
come aboard, though knowing nothing,’ ete. as 

The second clause will then be of this sort: ‘what pre- 
vents it from being a pirate ship?’ τί κωλύει μὴ οὐ λῃστικὴν 
εἶναι; ‘When I come to think of it, may be translated — 
literally, ὅταν ἐνθυμῶμαι : or it will, perhaps, be enough to 
say, ἐμοὶ γοῦν, ‘to my mind, at least.’ 

The whole will then be: καὶ yap σύ, ἔφη, ἐν μέρει ἀπο- 
κρίνου, πῶς οὐδὲν εἰδὼς οὔτ᾽ εἰ ἱκανὸν TO πλοῖον οὔτε εἰ 
ἔμπειρος ὁ ναύκληρος ὅμως ἐςβῆναι ἐτόλμησας" τί γὰρ 
κωλύει ὅσον σέ γ᾽ εἰδέναι μὴ οὐ λῃστικὴν εἶναι; ὥστε ἐμοὶ 
γοῦν θαυμασίως ὡς τολμηρὸς εἶναι δοκεῖς. ἰ 


Note (1) for ‘seaworthy’ it is enough to use the simple word 
‘adequate,’ ixavds;—(2) the idiomatic restrictive infinitive, ὅσον σέ 
γ᾽ εἰδέναι ;---(8) the normal μὴ οὐ after τί κωλύει, which means ‘ no- 
thing hinders,’ 


THE CAPTAIN AND THE PRIEST. 125 


δ. ‘Oh, with regard to that,’ said the priest, laughing, ‘I saw 
_ you had got safe so far, and so must be a pretty good 
sailor. And I have seen too many ships not to know when 
they are all right.’ 
_ ‘With regard to that,’ being logically elliptical, as it really 
- means ‘with regard to that I can answer you, or ‘ with 
regard to that you need not be surprised,’ had better in 
Greek be more clearly and fully expressed. ‘Got safe so 
far, is again rather idiomatic, and had best be turned accord- 
_ ing to the sense: ‘ had been voyaging safe for so long a time,’ 
_ ‘always returned safe from a voyage,’ or something like that. 
‘Good sailor,’ again, must be interpreted: ‘skilled in sailing.’ The 
last clause, too, is thoroughly vernacular, and must be translated 
according to the sense, which can easily be done in many ways. 
| We shall then have: τοῦτο μὲν δή, ἔφη γελάσας ὁ ἱερεύς, 
᾿ς μὴ θαύμαζε: γνοὺς γάρ σε ἀεὶ ἐκ πλοῦ σωθέντα ἐλογισάμην 
μετρίως εἶναι ἔμπειρον. καὶ μὴν καὶ περὶ νεὼς εἰ εὖ ἔχει 
σαφῶς δήπου ἐπίσταμαι, ὅστις γε τοσαύτας εἶδον. 
᾿ ᾿ς Νούο in the last clause the order of the words is carefully arranged 
a to bring out the real points. . 


6. ‘There now,’ exclaimed the captain, in a tone of mock dis- 
appointment, ‘I was going to give you credit for faith, and 
I find it’s only experience after all.’ 
The first exclamation being appropriate to a fit of vexa- 
tion, had best be turned by the Greek ‘alas.’ For ‘give you — 
_eredit’ (a commercial metaphor), we may substitute the more 
idiomatic Greek μακαρίζειν, properly ‘to congratulate, which 
_ takes the genitive. The last little phrase, ‘and I find it’s 
τ Bony experience after all,’ requires a thoroughly Greek usage 
to render: ἦν dpa—where the imperfect implies that the 
fact was so from the beginning: the dpa conveys that one — 
_ has only recently become aware of it. 
‘Then the last sentence will come out like this: ὁ δὲ ναύκλη- 
ρος ὥς πτερ δυσχεραίνων δή, Οἴμοι, ἔφη, ὡς ἤμελλον Hanae 
Eee σε τῆς πίστεως" τὸ δ᾽ ἣν ἄρα οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἢ ἐμπειρία. 


ay 
am 


eile So 
Ὁ eo 


XIX.—FRIENDS’ VERSES—(Boswk tt). 


1. Miss Reynolds—Aud what did you think of the 
poem ? 

Johnson.— Why, it was very well for a young miss’s 
verses : that is to say, compared with excellence, nothing: 
but very well for the person who wrote them. I am 
vexed at being shown verses in that manner. 

2. Miss Reynolds—But if they should be good, why ~ 
᾿ not give them hearty praise ? 

Johnson.—Why, madam, because I have not then got 
the better of my bad humour from having been shown 
them. You must consider, madam, beforehand, they may 
be bad as well as good. Nobody has a right to put an- 
other under such a difficulty, that he must either hurt — 
the person by telling the truth, or hurt himself by tell-_ 
ing what is not true. Bey 

3. Boswell—A man often shows his writings to people 
of eminence, to obtain from them, either from their good- 
nature, or from their not being able to tell the truth 
firmly, a commendation of which he may afterwards avail 
himself. : 

4. Johnson.—Very true, sir. Therefore, the man who — 
is asked by an author, what he thinks of his work, is 
put to the torture, and is not obliged to speak the truth: 
so that what he says is not considered as his opinion: 
yet he hath said it, and cannot retract it: and this author, 


when mankind are hunting him with a canister at his 
126 


re - FRIENDS’ VERSES. 127 


Γ tail, can say, ‘I would not have published had ποὺ John- 
son, or Reynolds, or Musgrave, or some other good judge 
~ commended the work.’ 


1. Miss Reynolds.—And what did you think of the poem? 
Johnson.—Why, it was very well for a young miss’s 
verses: that is to say, compared with excellence, nothing: 
_ but very well for the person who wrote them. Iam vexed 
at being shown verses in that manner. 


In the first clause, note that the Greek idiom is quite 
different from the English in two SoS viz., ‘the writings’ 
would be the subject, and ‘ seem’ instead δὴ think ’ yee, 
be the principal verb: and, secondly, the idea of ‘ poem” 
q would not come as a noun, but would be thrown into a verb: 

. _ thus the clause would be turned, ‘ how did they seem to you 
to have been written?’ or, actively, ‘how did she seem to 
_ you to have written them ?’—to write being ποιεῖν, used ᾿ 
π΄... In the next sentence, note the idiom ‘for a 
young miss’s verses.’ This is done in the Greek with ὡς. 
_ The real difficulty is with the next clause: ‘compared with 
_ excellence:’ the English is so abstract. Perhaps the most 
7 natural and simple way in Greek would be to say, ‘the 
poem in itself is worth nothing: but in relation to the powers 
_ of her who wrote,’ etc. . . . where ‘in relation to’ is κατὰ, 
with accusative. The last clause may be done literally : 
or we may say simply, ‘to have to read.’ Then we shall 
get for the whole: | 

__ P. πῶς οὖν ἐδόκει σοὶ ταῦτα πεποιηκέναι; 

LL. πάνυ καλῶς, ὡς νεᾶνις: λέγω δέ, αὐτὸ μὲν τὸ μέλος. 
οὐδενὸς ἄξιον, κατὰ δὲ τὴν φύσιν τῆς ποιούσης κάλλιστον. 
πὸ δὲ τοιαῦτα δεῖν ἀναγνῶναι λυπηρόν. 


128 ι΄ _ LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


2. Miss Reynolds.—But if they should be good, why not give 
them hearty praise ? 


Johnson.—Why, madam, because I have not then got the 


better of my bad humour from having been shown them. 
You must consider, madam, beforehand, they may be bad 


as well as good. -Nobody has a right to put another under © 


such a difficulty, that he must either hurt the person by 


telling the truth, or hurt himself by telling what is not 


true. 


In the first clause, there is a slight obscurity about the 
word ‘then’: it means at the time when the verses are 
shown to him: and in the Greek I think it would be better 


to make this clear: it can be done by simply saying ὅταν 


δείξῃ, without any great waste of words. 
In the second clause, there is another expression which 


wants to be made a little clearer, namely, ‘beforehand, they — 


may be bad as well as good’: the neatest way is to say, “1 
don’t yet know if they are...’ In the last clause, there is 
a slight ambiguity in the word ‘hurt,’ which in its first use 


means ‘to give pain to,’ and in its second use means ‘to 
wrong. We might possibly use λυπεῖν for both: or, as 
would perhaps be better, use ‘pain’ for the first, and ‘wrong,’ 

or ‘do wrong,’ for the other. The rest is easy, and we shall — 


get for the whole: 


\ 9 a a 
P, ἐὰν δὲ εὖ ἔχῃ, πῶς οὐ προθύμως ἐπαινεῖς ; 


I. ὅταν γὰρ δείξῃ, οὔπω δὴ πέπαυμαι δυσχεραίνων eb 


δεῖ ἀναγνῶναι; ἐνθυμητέον γάρ, ὦ φίλη, ὅτι οὔπω οἶδα 
εἰ καλῶς ἔχει ἢ μή. οὐδὲ δίκαιός ἐστιν οὐδεὶς ἐς τοιαύτην 
ἀπορίαν ἕτερον καταστῆσαι, ὥστε ἀνάγκην εἷναι ἢ ἀληθῆ 
λέγοντα ἐκεῖνον λυπῆσαι, ἢ αὐτὸν ἀδικεῖν ψευδόμενον. 


Note (1) εἰ after δυσχεραίνω (emotion verb) ;—(2) ἢ μή: after εἰ 
‘whether’ we may use either ἢ οὔ or ἢ μή. 


ὖ ΩΓ. pe 
ae, Cie ee a 


\ 
eer. = 


My 


ihe it δα χα a 


Ν ph eked = re ae ee! o> Sion 
+ ty ~~ = 


a Py pene : ων τὰ "" PA 
XI X.] : : τ | = FRIENDS’ VERSES. : 129. 


9. Boswell. —A man often shows his writings to people of 

oe _ eminence, to obtain from them, either from their good- 
nature, or from their not being able to tell the truth firmly, 

& a commendation of which he may afterwards avail him- — 
~ self. 


2 pe crenstare in this passage is exactly the Greek 
ὑήθεια, which implies the sort of good-nature which is half 
way to folly. ‘To tell the truth sage may be καρτερεῖν 
ΗΝ or ἀληθῆ λέγειν καὶ μὴ ἀποκνεῖν. “Τὸ obtain 
δ ν᾽ is, of course, English artificiality : we must 
"(according to the principles often enunciated) take the sen- 
tence the other way up, and make the ‘ people of eminence’ 
‘the subject, and the verb simply ‘praise.’ The only difficulty 
F then left is ἬΝ the words, ‘of which he may afterwards 
avail himself’: and this had better be a new sentence: 
then he Fmnself may use the praise.’ The whole will then 
be: 

᾿ς Β. πολλάκις γὰρ συμβαίνει ὥστε τοῖς σοφοῖς τινὰ ἃ 
ἐ ἐποίησεν δεῖξαι, ἵνα ἢ δι’ εὐήθειαν, ἢ μὴ τολμῶντες 
τὰ καρτερεῖν ἀληθεύοντες, ἐπαινέσωσιν, εἶτα αὐτὸς τῷ ἐπαίνῳ 
χρῆται. 

_ Note the convenient συμβαίνει ὥστε. 

Bs 


τι. νοι true, sir. Therefore, a man who is Ὁ 
τ asked by an author what he thinks of his work, is put | 
Ε to the torture, and is not obliged to speak the truth : 

__ that what he says is not considered as his opinion: yet fa 

has said it, and cannot retract it: and this author, when 

mankind are hunting him with a canister at his tail, can © 
say, ‘I would not have published had not Johnson, or 

- Reynolds, or Musgrave, or some other good judge com-» 
_ mended the work.’ 


a ‘he first part had better be done in a more simple manner 
than the English, by saying: ‘If the writer ask, etc. In 


τ 


130 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. (XIX. 


the next sentence there is a catch, in the words ‘he is put to ~ 
the torture, and is, etc., being really a concealed metaphor, — 
The real logical meaning is: ‘ He is like a man who is tor- 
tured, and is therefore not obliged,’ etc. We had better say 
shortly, ‘it is open to him as though being tortured .. .’ 
‘Not considered as his opinion’ is again catchy and very 
idiomatic: the Greeks would say rather, ‘we must not think 
he is speaking what he really thinks, or something like 
that. In the next clause, ‘to retract’ has no regular equi- 
valent : but we find a metaphorical expression in Plato, viz., 
ἀναθέσθαι, which means literally ‘to take back a move’ at 
draughts—a game which was rather a favourite with the 
Athenians: this word may therefore be used. ‘ Hunting 
‘with a canister’ is a highly picturesque expression, of course, 
taken from the familiar sight of the village dog with a pack 
of young ruffians behind him: in Greek we must either put 
out the metaphor at full length into a simile, or give some 
equivalent: I think that, perhaps, it will suffice to say, 
‘pursued with shouting and cries.’ For ‘to publish, we 
‘find in Plato the verb ἐκφέρειν. For the names of the 
various great literary men, use naturally corresponding lite- 
rary names of Greeks. 

There is no further difficulty, and the whole will be: 

I. ἀληθῆ λέγεις. ἐὰν τοίνυν ἐρωτᾷ τινα ὁ ποιητής, 
Πῶς ἄρα δοκεῖ αὐτῷ πεποιῆσθαι, ἔξεστι δήπου ἐκείνῳ 
ὥσπερ στρεβλουμένῳ ὑποστείλασθαι, οὐδὲ τὸν ἐπαινοῦντα 
τὸ δόξαν λέγειν νομιστέον" καίτοι ὁ μὲν οὐ δύναται ἅπερ 
ἔλεξεν ἀναθέσθαι, ὁ δὲ ποιητής, ὅταν καταγελῶσιν ἄν- 
θρωποι ὡσπερεὶ βοῇ καὶ κραυγῇ διώκοντες, ἀπολογεῖσθαι 
δὴ ἔχει, ὡς οὐκ ἄρα ἐξέφερεν ἂν ἃ πεποίηκεν, εἰ μὴ 
Σωκράτης ἐπήνεσεν ἢ ᾿Αγάθων ἢ ἄλλος τις τῶν ἱκανῶν 
διαγνῶναι. 

Note (1) the dramatic particles all through ;—(2) ὑποστέλλομαι,, 


literally, ‘to furl the sails,’ a vivid and idiomatic metaphor for con- 
cealing or suppressing the truth. 


XX.— REV ELATIONS—(Swirt). 


1. Here I discovered the roguery or ignorance of those 
who pretend to write anecdotes or secret history; who 
_ send so many kings to their graves with a cup of poison; 
will repeat the discourse between a prince and chief © 
_ minister, where no witness was by; unlock the thoughts 
᾿ς and cabinets of ambassadors and secretaries of state; and 
have the perpetual misfortune to be mistaken. Ὁ. Here 
_I discovered the true causes of many- events that have 
surprised the world. A general confessed in my presence 
_ that he had got a victory purely by force of cowardice and 
 ill-conduct; and an admiral, that for want of proper 
intelligence, he beat the enemy to whom he intended 
to betray the fleet. 3. Three kings protested to me that 
in their whole reign they never did once prefer any person 
: οὗ merit, unless by mistake, or treachery of some minister 
in whom they confided: neither would they do it if they 
_ were to live again: and they showed, with great strength 
of reason, that the royal throne could not be supported 
without corruption, because that positive, confident, restive 
_ temper which virtue infused into a man was a perpetual 
clog to public business. 4, I had the curiosity to inquire, 
ina particular manner, by what methods great members 
had procured to themselves high titles and prodigious 
estates. A great number of persons concerned were 
called up; and, upon a very slight examination, discovered 
‘such a scene of infamy, that I cannot reflect upon it without 
Z Some seriousness. 6. Perjury, oppression, subornation, 


at aud, pandarism, and the like infirmities, were among the 
: 131 


132 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE, 


most excusable arts they had to mention: and for these Ἔξ 


made, as it was reasonable, great allowance. Θ. But when — 
some confessed that they owed their greatness and wealth — 


to debauchery ; others to the betraying of their country or 


their prince; more, to the perverting of justice, in order — 


to destroy the innocent; I hope I may be pardoned if 
these discoveries inclined me a little to abate of that pro- 
found veneration, which I am naturally apt to pay to 


persons of high rank, who ought to be treated with the 


utmost respect due to their sublime dignity, by us their — 


inferiors. 


1. Here I discovered the roguery or ignorance of those who 


pretend to write anecdotes or secret history ; who send so — 


many kings to their graves with a cup of poison; will 
repeat the discourse between a prince and chief minister, 
where no witness was by ; unlock the thoughts and cabinets 
of ambassadors and secretaries of state; and have the 
perpetual misfortune to be mistaken. 


In the structure there is nothing to alter of any great im- 


portance: the playful form of expression by which the man — 


who describes the murder of kings is said to ‘send them to 


their graves,’ being quite as possible in the elegant irony of 


Greek as in the more solemn jesting of the original English. 


As to the phrases: ‘the roguery or ignorance’ will — 


naturally be done by an indirect sentence,— how ignorant 
and wicked they are.’ ‘Unlock the thoughts and cabinets’ 


is perhaps the hardest phrase to turn satisfactorily. Wemay — 


say, διαπττύσσουσιν, ‘unfold them, ὡς τοιαῦτα γράφοντας 


ἢ ἐνθυμουμένους ‘as writing or thinking so-and-so;’ the 
rather poetic and unusual word διαπτύσσω, ‘to unfold, 


giving a good point to the irony. Care must be taken in 
the last line to give the irony in the phrase ‘have the per- 


petual misfortune to be mistaken.’ Perhaps we may say: — 


‘always somehow miss the truth,’ 


¢ 


ὡς τὰ 


Me. REVELATIONS. 133 


‘The whole of 1 then will be something of this kind: 
Ταῦτα δὲ σκοπῶν ἔγνων δ) ὡς ἀμαθεῖς κἡ ἢ ἄδικοί εἰσιν 
ὅσοι Ta κρυφῆ γενόμενα καὶ τοὺς πολλοὺς λεληθότα 
ἀ ἐξιοῦσι δηλῶσαι' οἵτινες τῶν μὲν βασιλέων ἐνίους 
φαρμάκῳ ἀποκτιννύασιν, ἕτερον δὲ διηγοῦνται ὅσα τῷ 
συμβούλῳ μόνος μόνῳ διελέ ig Bets δὲ καὶ a 
συμ Ὁ μόνος μόνῳ διελέγετο, πρέσβεις δὲ καὶ ἄρχον- 
tas διαπτύσσουσιν ὡς τὸ καὶ τὸ ἐνθυμουμένους ἢ 
1 τὸ καὶ πάντα δὴ ταῦτα πράσσοντες ὅμως τοῦ 
ἀληθοῦς ἀεί πως ὑπολείπονται. 


_ Note (1) the Platonic form ἀποκτιννύασι ;—(2) the idiom μόνος μόνῳ, 
a téte-a-téte ;—(3) the idiom τὸ καὶ τό for ‘ so-and-so,’ 


Bo. . Here I discovered the true causes of many events that have 
— surprised the world. A general confessed in my presence 
that he had got a victory purely by force of cowardice and 
ill-conduct ; and an admiral that for want of proper intel- 
- __ ligence, he beat the enemy to whom he intended to betray 
2 _ the fleet. 

4 ‘In the first sentence the clearness is improved if we adopt 
+ 16 common device of putting the relative-sentence first, 
(what things the people wonder at having happened, of those,’ 
: The clause about the general offers no particular 
fficulty ; ‘ill-conduct’ means, I suppose, want of the proper 
e and skill, for which the word dvova will do; in the last 
use, the phrase ‘for want of proper intelligence’ means, 
uppose, that the scouts or messengers had neglected to 
iver their tidings at the proper time, or something of that 
. We may say κατασκόπων ἀμελείᾳ, or ἁμαρτίᾳ, or 
genitive absolute. It also, perhaps, seems that the irony 
the end of the passage would be improved if we turned it~ 
s: ‘not only did not betray the fleet . . . but not even 
rere beaten .. .᾿. 


134 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. — (xx. 


n Ἃ / Δ oF > \ / / 
νικῆσαι ἢ δειλίαν καὶ ἄνοιαν' εἶτα δὲ vavapyos τις κατα- 
σκόπων ἔφη ἀμελείᾳ μὴ ὅτι προδοῦναι (ὡς διενοεῖτο) τοῖς 
ΡΜ fo β 
, \ \ 2 b) Ἀν ὦ: an 

πολεμίοις TO ναυτικὸν GAN οὐδὲ ἡσσηθῆναι. 

Note the idiom μὴ ὅτι, which (with negative following) means ‘so 
far from doing . . . he did noteven.. ἢ 


3. Three kings protested to me that in their whole reign they 
never did once prefer any person of merit, unless by mistake, 
or treachery of some minister in whom they confided; 
neither would they do it if they were to live again; and 
they showed, with great strength of reason, that the royal 
throne could not be supported without corruption, because 
that positive, confident, restive temper which virtue infused 
into a man was a perpetual clog to public business. 


The emphatic phrase, ‘ never once in their whole reign,’ it 
is perhaps enough to render by the strong word, μηδεπώποτε. 
‘Prefer’ is of course technical, and requires interpretation ; 
it means, ‘appoint to office, ἐς ἀρχὴν καταστῆσαι. ‘Of 
merit’ will in Greek be the more direct and simple ‘of 
worthy persons, τῶν ἀξίων. Finally, the abstracts, ‘by 
mistake’ and ‘by treachery, will of course be done in the 
personal way as usual. In the latter half of the passage we ~ 
may perhaps take one Greek word for ‘to show with great 
strength of reason,’ namely, διϊσχυρίζεσθαι, which means | 
‘to insist on,’ ‘to strongly show’; or if this does not appear 
to be sufficiently near the English, then we may say, ‘ they 
affirmed, saying persuasive things,’ or something of that sort. 
‘Throne ... be supported,’ must of course be done more 
plainly and without metaphor. Again, ‘ without corruption’ 
must be personal: ‘without the people being corrupted.’ 
The last clause of all requires a complete recasting, simply — 
because the whole structure of it is based on the English 
abstract and personifying method of expressing ideas. There 
are naturally many possible ways of doing this satisfactorily, 
one of which is to say, ‘owing to virtue men grow so... that 


a REVELATIONS, 135 


᾽ 


: they. are a hindrance to . Perhaps the greatest difficulty 
is to get the right words «6 express the carefully chosen and 
highly ironical and effective epithets, ‘ positive,’ ‘ confident, 
_ ‘restive.’ I suggest, as rendering the spirit of these words, 
_ the adjectives ὀξεῖς, αὐτάρκεις, θυμοειδεῖς. 
We shall then have dealt with the chief difficulties, and 
the Greek may stand as follows: τέλος δὲ τρεῖς βασιλεῖς 
 διώμοσαν ἢ μὴν μηδεπώποτε μηδένα τῶν ye ἀξίων és 
ἀρχὴν καταστῆσαι, εἰ μὴ ἄκοντες ἢ ὑπὸ τῶν ἀρχόντων οἷς 
ἐπετέτραπτο ἐξαπατώμενοι': μηδὲ οὖν τὸ λοιπὸν εἰ 
 ἀναβιῴεν: οὐδὲ γὰρ οἷόν τ’ ἔφασαν εἶναι (πιθανὰ δὴ 
4 λέγοντες ταῦτα) καθεστάναι τὴν ἀρχὴν μὴ διεφθαρμένων 
τῶν πολλῶν: διὰ γὰρ ἀρετὴν οὕτως ὀξεῖς καὶ αὐτάρκεις 
4 καὶ θυμοειδεῖς γίγνεσθαι τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ὥστε ἐμποδι- 
 σθῆναι σφόδρα τὰ πράγματα. 
a Note (1) 4 μὴν particle after verb of swearing ;—(2) μὴ, not ov, 
_ with the swearing or strongly denying verb. 
φ : 
a 4 I had the curiosity to inquire, in a particular manner, by — 
what methods men had procured to themselves high titles 
_ and prodigious estates A great number of persons con- 
cerned were called up; and, upon a very slight examina- 
Σ tion, discovered such a scene of infamy, that I cannot 
ἣν reflect upon it without some seriousness. 


In this sentence, the phrase ‘had the curiosity’ may be 
‘done more simply by saying ‘I resolved.’ I should also 
simplify in the remainder of the sentence by getting rid of 
‘high titles’ and ‘ prodigious estates,’ and substituting ‘ rich’ 
ἫΝ ‘famous. In the next clause the phrase is a little 
=f) clearer if we keep strictly to the real agent, 41 called up and ᾿ 
samined a great number, etc. The real difficulty is 
vith the last sentence, ‘discovered such a scene of in agns 
that I cannot reflect upon it without some seriousness.’ We 
1 have first the very abstract phrase, scene of infamy; in the 


2%. 
s 
en: - 


+ 


136 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


Se 


Greek we should, I think, make it all more personal, 
usual. It will then become, ‘were found to be so infam 
that,’ etc. In the last clause we must at all costs get the 
irony expressed, or all the real effectiveness is lost. To be : 
serious is σπουδὴν ποιεῖσθαι, and I think we may here say, Σ 
τῷ ὄντι σπουδήν TVA ποιοῦμαι ἐνθυμούμενος, ‘I feel 10. ὯΝ a 
be rather serious.’ ‘The only thing that remains is, ‘upon a 
very slight examination,’ and this we may even exaggerate ins 
the Greek; we may say, ‘before we even had been asked,’ 

πρὶν καὶ ἐρωτᾶσθαι. ie 

There is ee else important, and the whole will then 
be: καὶ μὴν καὶ ἀκριβέστερόν μοι ἔδοξε’ περὶ τῶν πλουσίων. 
καὶ ἐλλογίμων πυθέσθαι τίνα δὴ τρόπον ἐς τοσοῦτον — 
Brat: ὥστε συχνοὺς καλέσας ἐξήλεγχον' οἱ δὲ πρὶν ae 
Kab ἐρωτᾶσθαι οὕτω μιαροὶ καὶ ἄτοποι ἐφάνησαν ὄντες, 
ὥστε τῷ ὄντι σπουδήν τινα ποιοῦμαι ἐνθυμούμενος. Or, — 
if πρὶν καὶ ἐρωτᾶσθαι seems a little too strong, we may say 
simply εὐθὺς ἐρωτώμενοι. 


5. Perjury, oppression, subornation, fraud, pandarism, and thea 
like infirmities, were among the most excusable arts they a Ε 
had to fenton and for these I made, as was reasonable, — 
great allowance. πο. 


This sentence wants (I think) more recasting than usual 
the real antithesis is between the more heimous offences tha 
follow in the next clause, and what he ludicrously professes . 
to regard asthe more trifling errors in this sentence ; and while — 
we must, I think, make the whole more personal, we shiz 
have to make clear and prominent this antithesis. Then we — 
shall have something like this: ‘whatever more moderate 
sins they committed by perjuring themselves, injuring 
weak, etc., ‘for these I naturally had great forgivent 
Of the three words, ‘subornation, etc., the three Gre 
words ὑφίημι, παρακρούειν, προαγωγεύειν will probabl} τὰ 
help the translator. 


REVELATIONS. 137 


- There will then be no further GHBCUUAY: and we ἸΑΙΥ say 
4 for the whole: ὅσα μὲν γὰρ τῶν μετρίων ἔφασαν ἁμαρ- 
᾿ τάνειν, ἐπιορκοῦντες, τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς ἀδικοῦντες, mpoarya- 
᾿ γεύοντες, παρακρούοντες, πονηροὺς ὑφιέντες, τὰ τοιαῦτα, 
τούτων ὡς εἰκός πολλὴν εἶχον ξυγγνώμην. 


δ» 
> 


6. But when some confessed that they owed their greatness and 
- wealth to debauchery ; others to the betraying of their 


E country or their prince; more, to the perverting of justice, 
Γῇ order to destroy the innocent ; I hope I may be pardoned 
____. if these discoveries inclined me a little to abate of that pro- 


. found veneration, which I am naturally apt to pay to 
ay persons of high rank, who ought to be treated with the 
utmost respect due to their sublime dignity, by us their 
inferiors. 


In the first half of this long sentence I should advise the 
student to put the causes of the greatness and wealth well to — 

- the front, in the following way: ‘when some by debauchery, 
Ε others by ... others by ... admitted they had become...,’ 
Bs ΤΣ something of that sort. The phrase ‘ perverting of justice 
in order to destroy the innocent’ wants a little recasting to 
: make it clearer and less allusive: say, ‘ by having unjustly con- 
_ demned the innocent for their destruction.’ Then we shall 
: find no further difficulty down as far as the word ‘ innocent.’ 
_ The real point is in the last half of the sentence to keep fully 
_theirony. For ‘I hope I may be pardoned: we have for- 
_ tunately the special Greek idiom οὐ νεμεσητὸν, ‘it is no 
plame to me if . . ., which originally comes out of Homer 
_ but i is used by Plato, As to the rest, the sentence is easier 
if we break it up as follows: ‘I was brought into such a state 


- that 1 reverenced rather less the nobles ... not but that 
(ov μὴν ἀλλὰ, or ὅμως) I both am accustomed ... and I 


_ think they are deserving . 

_ Then we have solved all ΤΣ practical difficulties, and” we 

me By. write for the whole sentence the Greek as follows: 
ee. K 

‘SS 


138 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. (XX. . 


5 \ Ν ς \ / id \ n \ / \ \ 
ἐπεὶ δὲ οἱ μὲν μισητίᾳ, οἱ δὲ TH τὴν πόλιν καὶ TOV 
βασιλέα προδοῦναι, οἱ δὲ τῷ ἀδίκως τῶν ἀναιτίων κατα- 
γνῶναι ἐπὶ διαφθορᾷ, πλοῦτον καὶ δόξαν ὡμολόγουν 
κτήσασθαι, οὐ δήπου νεμεσητὸν εἰ τοιαῦτα μαθὼν οὕτω 
/ « 5) f \ 3 n / > / 
διετέθην ὥστε ἧττόν TL τοὺς εὐγενεῖς σέβεσθαι ἐθέλειν' 
\ 7 n 
ov μὴν ἀλλὰ Kal φύσει εἴωθα αὐτοὺς πάντων μᾶλλον 
a) > eae) / 5 5 e ς / BA ς τῷ Ὁ 
τιμᾶν, καὶ ἀξίους οἵἴμαι εἶναι ὡς ὑψίστους ὄντας ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν 
τῶν φαυλοτέρων ἀεὶ τοιαῦτα τιμᾶσθαι. 


ΝΎ ΡΥ ΠΡ Τ᾿ 
‘ ; 


ΠΧ τ ἀν Co Br: = 
[The numbers of Sections refer to the Hints on Structure and Idiom. ] 


1. 


But through civil discord,! Bericus—what he was further is 
not known—with the others of his party, flying to Rome, per- 


_ suaded Claudius the Emperor to aninvasion.? Claudius, now 


Consul the third time, and desirous to do something whence 
he might gain the honour of a triumph, at the persuasion? of 
these fugitives, whom the Britons demanding he had denied 
to render, and they for that cause had ὃ denied further amity 
with Rome, makes choice of this island for his province, and 
sends before him Plautius, the Praetor, with this command : 
If the business grew * difficult, to give him notice, Plautius 
with much ado persuaded the legions to move out of Gallia, 
murmuring® that now they must be put to make war beyond 
the world’s end, for so they counted Britain; and what 
welcome Julius the Dictator had found there doubtless they 
had heard. At last prevailed with, and hoisting sail from 
three separate ports, lest their landing ® should in any one 
place be resisted, meeting cross winds, they were cast back 
and disheartened, till in the night a meteor shooting flames 
from the east, and, as they fancied, directing their course, they 
took heart® again to try the sea, and without opposition 
landed. 


1g 2, 381, ὃ § 30. 489, ὅ 8 6, ὁ 8 13, 


139 


140 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


2. 


The island, not yet Britain, but Albion, was in a manner 


desert and inhospitable ; kept only by a remnant of giants, — 
whose excessive force! and tyranny had consumed the rest. 


Them Brutus destroys, and to his people divides the land, 
which with some reference to his own name he thenceforth 


calls Britain. Τὸ Corineus, Cornwall, as we now call it, fell — 


by lot; the rather by him liked, for that the hugest giants, 


in rocks and caves, were said to lurk there; which kind οὗ 


monsters to deal with was his old care and exercise And 
here with leave? bespoken to recite a grand fable, though 
dignified by our best poets: While Brutus, on a certain 
festival day solemnly kept on that shore, where he first 
landed, was with the people in great jollity and mirth, a 
crew of these savages breaking in upon them, began on a 


sudden to try? another sort of game than at such a meeting 


was expected. But at length by many hands overcome, 
Goemagog, the hugest, is reserved alive that with him 
Corineus might try his strength; whom, in a wrestle, the 
terrible giant catching aloft, with a parlous hug broke three 
of his ribs, nevertheless the other, heaving him up by main 


force, and bearing him on his shoulders to the next high 
rock, threw him headlong, all shattered, into the sea, and left 


his name on the cliff, called ever after The Giant’s Leap. — 
earn 2816. 


9. 


Burghley reminded: her of her correspondence* with the 


Catholics. She adhered to her point, that she had done no 
more than she had always warned the Queen she would do, — 


—throw” herself on the support of the Catholic powers. She 


confined? her denial to the conspiracy to assassinate, and no — 
question could shake the constancy with which she clung to — 


it; no cross-question could entangle her in contradiction. 


She still solemnly declared that she knew nothing of the — 
plot. So the first day closed. She had produced some effect, — 


but probably less than she had expected. When the court 


resumed next morning she was warmer and more passionate. — 


She complained that her reputation was argued away by the* 


ih 
“ ἀξ Sila ὟΨ 


“pe ΨΥ ee 


aa 


EXERCISES. 141 


᾿ς wretched inferences of a few lawyers. Princes anointed were 
not (she seemed to think) like common mortals, and the 
word of a prince was not, if solemnly given, to be lightly 
disregarded. The cause was so handled, she said, that she 
was made to descend from her proper dignity. She μα to 
appear like a common criminal in a court of justice. The 
object she well knew was to exclude her from the succession, 
but she was more willing to pray for the people than to hurt 
the meanest of them, and she used words which, if they 
meant anything, meant that she was still open to conver- 
sion. It was impossible that either friends or foes could 
attach any credence to this last hint. 


1§§ 3, 4. 28 9, 385. 4 88. 12,.13. 6815; 
4, 


This victory obtained, and a sufficient strength left in the 
town, Brutus, with Antigonus, the king’s brother, and his 
friend Anacletus, whom he had taken in the fight, returns 

with the residue of his friends in the thick woods, while the 
enemy with all speed re-collecting, besieges the town. 
“Brutus to relieve his men, who earnestly called him, dis- 
trusting the sufficiency of his force, bethinks himself of this 
policy: Calls tohim Anacletus, and threatening instant death 
else, enjoins him that he-should go at the second hour of the 
night to the Greekish League, and tell the guards he had 
brought Antigonus by stealth out of prison, to a certain 
ἢ woody vale, unable, through the weight of his fetters, to 
Ἷ 
4 


“ὦ 


move him further, entreating them to come speedily and 
fetch him in. Anacletus, to save both himself and his 
friend, swears this, and at a fit hour sets on alone towards the 
camp; is met,’ examined, and at last unquestionably known. 
To whom great profession of fidelity? first made, he frames 
his tale, as had been taught him; and they, now fully 
assured, with a credulous rashness leaving their stations, 
fared accordingly by the ambush that there awaited them. 
_ Forthwith Brutus divided his men into three parts, leads on in 
_ silence to the camp, commanding first each part at a several 
_ place to enter, and forbear execution? till he with his squadron, 
_ possessed of the king’s tent, gave signal by the trumpet. 


1§ 13, 23 2; 5 8 4, 


142 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


5. 


His two sons Belinus and Brennus, contending about the — 


crown,! by decision of friends came at length to an accord: 
Brennus to have the north of Humber, Belinus the 


sovereignty of all. But the younger, not longer so con-- 


tented, that he, as they whispered? to him, whose valour 
had so often repelled the invasions of others, should now be 
subject to his brother, upon new designs sails into Norway, 
enters league and affinity with Elsing that king, which 
Belinus perceiving in his absence dispossesses him of all the 
north. Brennus with a fleet of Norwegians makes toward 
Britain, but. encountered ὃ by Guthlack the Danish king who 
laying claim to his bride, pursued him on sea, his haste 
was retarded, and he bereft of his spouse, who from the 


fight, by a sudden tempest, was with the Danish king driven — 


into Northumberland and brought to Belinus. Brennus 
nevertheless, finding means to collect his navy, lands in 


Albania, and gives battle to his brother in the wood 


Calaterium; but, losing the day, escaped with one single 
ship into Gaul. Meanwhile the Dane upon his own offer? to 


become tributary, sent home with his new prize, Belinus — 


returns his thoughts to the administering of justice and the 


perfecting of his father’s law. And to explain what high- 


ways might enjoy * the aforesaid privileges, he caused to be 
drawn out and paved four main roads to the utmost lene 
and breadth of the island. 


+§.1. 2 §§ 6, 20 (0). 5. 8. 13. $$ 10 


6. 


At last, failing through age, he determines to bestow 


his daughters, and so among them to divide his kingdom. 
Yet, first to try which of them loves him best, he resolves a 
simple resolution ! to ask them solemnly in order, and which 
of them should profess largest, her to believe. Gonorill, the 
eldest, apprehending too well her father’s weakness, makes 


answer, invoking heaven that she loved him above her soul. 
Therefore, quoth the old man, overjoyed, since thou so — 


Se ee. ee 


one =e 


= ST ee i ΨΥ ee] 2 2! Ls 
᾿ Ψ ᾽ = 


EXERCISES. 143 


honourest my declining age, to thee and the husband whom 
thou shalt choose I give the third part of my realm. So 
fair a speeding? for a few words soon uttered, was to Regan, 
the second, ample instruction what to say. She, on the same 
demand, spares no protesting; and the gods must? witness 
that otherwise to express her thoughts she knew not, but 
that she loved him above all creatures ; and so receives an 
equal reward with her sister. But Cordellia, the youngest, 


though hitherto best beloved, and now before her eyes the 


rich and easy present hire‘ of a little easy soothing, yet moves 
not from the solid purpose of a sincere and virtuous answer. 
Father, said she, my love toward you is as my duty bids; 
What should a father seek?> what should a child promise 
more ἢ 

1817. 3881, 2, 13. 3§ 15. 4981, 9. δ § 34. 


Th 


At night, when they were gone to rest, Mackoneil beset 
the house wherein Macklein and his people lay with a 
number of men, and called him to come forth and drink; he 
answered,! that of drink they had too much, and that it was 
then time to rest. Yet it is my will, said Mackoneil, that 
ye arise and come forth. Macklein hearing this began to 


suspect some bad dealing,? and dressing himself and his men, 


did open the door; where, perceiving a company in arms, 
and Mackoneil with his sword drawn, he asked what the 
matter was, and if he meant to break his faith. No; faith, 
said he, 1 gave none, and must now have an account of you 
and your friends for the wrong I have received. Macklein 


had taken his nephew, a little child, to bed with him, and 


being put to his defence,’ kept the child on his left shoulder 
in manner of a targe. The child cried for mercy to his 
uncle: wherewith Mackoneil, moved, did promise to spare 
his life, providing he would render his weapons, and become 


his prisoner. Macklein, feeling no better,* was content, and 


thereupon was conveyed with some keepers to another 
house. All the rest (two excepted) upon the like promise 
rendered themselves. 

1 8 91, 2§ 3, 8 8 δ, 4 8 18, 


144 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


8. ae) 
Of all the conspirators, Fenius Rufus was the one whose 
fate deserved the least pity. As prefect of the guards, he 
contrived adroitly to place himself on the tribunal by the — 
side of Tigellinus, and sought to screen? himself from inquiry” 
by the violence with which he judged his own associates. — 
Denounced at last by one of the victims,? he turned pale, 
stammered, and was unable to defend himself. The accused 
were speedily convicted. Doomed without mercy by this 
domestic inquisition, they were allowed to choose their mode 
of death, an indulgence which spared the Government the 
odium of a public sentence.° When escape was impossible, 
the culprits suffered with the callous fortitude which had 
become habitual with their class® under the terrors of the 
imperial tyranny. If they deigned to flatter the Prince with 
their last breath, it was for the sake of their children. 
Lucan died with a firmness which, while he still hoped for 
pardon, is said to have failed him; and when his veins were 
opened in the bath, found consolation in reciting some of his _ 
own verses, descriptive of a monstrous death by bleeding at 
every pore. τον, 
1g 9, 291, 3 8 3. 4 8 9], ὅ 8 5, 


The fight! began with small shot? on both sides, but pre- 
sently was continued by the cannon,” the English endeavouring 
to beat the Scots out of the church? steeple, the Scots to beat 
the English out of the sconces; by that time it was low- 
water, the Scots had made a breach with their cannon in the — 
greater sconce, where Colonel Lansford commanded, and — 


* 
sy τ 
πε τὼ 


divers were slain, which struck such a fear into the soldiers, F 
who had but a slight acquaintance with the terrible face of 
war, and these frightful shapes of death, that, notwithstanding 
all the persuasions and entreaties of that brave commander, 2a 


7 
as, 


they basely threw down their arms and deserted the service ; 

they alsowho maintained the other breast-work retreating from 
it, the Scots who, from the rising ground, perceived their dis- _ 
order, immediately commanded a body of horse under Sir 


7 eee 


EXERCISES. 145 


a 
‘ses 


ον Thomas Hope, and the regiments of foot of Crawford, Lindsey, 


1§ 13. 2 § 25. 
10. 


z ce The very neighbourhood of an enemy seemed to have been 
_ forgotten—so entirely the commonest precautions were 
neglected. A rough lesson! brought them to a recollection of 

_ their position. On the 14th of April? a party of French, dis- 
_ guised as women, entered the English works, and walked 
over them and round them; they killed a sentinel, who had 
τς perhaps? discovered them, and carried off his head as an orna- 
᾿ς ment to Leith church.?, The next day the garrison poured 
out in a swarm, cut up the pioneers in the trenches, spiked 
____the cannon, and took Sir Maurice Berkeley—who was the 
first to come~to the rescue—prisoner. Arthur Grey, Captain 
᾿ς Vaughan, and others, each as they could collect their com- 
panies, rushed to the front in time to save the guns ;? but the 


rd 


an French would not retreat till half the English army was . 


_ brought into the field. It was one of the hottest skirmishes* 


ever seen. 
1 881, 13. 3 8 25. 8 § 20. 48 2. 


11. 


but to cut it up by the roots,? and to establish themselves in 
a sovereign and boundless authority of sitting so long as they 
pleased themselves. 
x To effect this there was a necessity® to amuse the nation 
_ with strange fears and jealousies of plots, conspiracies both 
domestic and foreign, and to draw the people into tumultuary 

heats and disorders* after the example of Scotland, and there- 
by oblige the King to compliances with their unreasonable 
and ambitious demands. And the sequel will abundantly 
manifest that Mr. Pym, the great engineer* of the faction, 
so long as he lived never wanted plots or tumults to usher 
in his great designs, two of which were now the death of 
Ν 1.8.3, 281]. 8 88 15, 2. 43.90 4 


Thus did they endeavour not only to prune the Prerogative,! — 


146 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


Strafford, and the obtaining a bill® for the sitting of the Ὁ 
present Parliament till they should be dissolved by their own 
consent. 

Of which the reader will receive a more full account in 
the second volume of these Collections, this having already 
risen to an unexpected bulk,® whither, to avoid repetition, 


he is referred. 
5 8 25, 6 8 12, 


12. 


His Majesty saw, and with an admirable patience supported 
these unjust procedures; but alas! he had the wolf by the 
ears, bitten while he held him, but worried if he let him go: 
for there were now two armies in the kingdom, which ? to- 
gether with his former expenses in the northern expeditions, 
had plunged him into an irrecoverable debt, without the 
assistance of Parliamentary supplies ; without money there 
was nothing to be done, the posture of his affairs appearing 
so ruinous, and no money was to be had but upon such 
terms as the faction pleased ; one of which was the disvoting © 
of the bishops :* and whoever curiously observes the move- 
ment of affairs will see that the House of Commons,’ notwith- 
standing the compliment they made of inspecting his revenue, 
yet raised money by inches,‘ and by the dilatory proceedings 
in the Scots’ Treaty, who they might with half the expense 
have obliged to disband and return into their country, they — 
still increased the King’s necessities ® and the charge of the 
kingdom before they raised money to defray them. 


aS 11. 2 88 5, 13. 3 § 25. 4§ 9. ὅ 8 8, 


19, 


How infinitely this great Prince was abused and misre- 
presented to his subjects by these factious people in private, __ 
none can doubt who does but consider that even this speech __ 
was represented in public by the prints! so different both 
from his Majesty's words and sense, as if they had a design 
to prepare the mind of the nation for the belief of that plot 
of a design to bring up the armies to London, and to bring d 


EXERCISES. 147 


------ | Ἠ -... 


over the Irish army, which was now hatching? and ready to 
be broached? to amuse the people. The weekly disperser of 
the intelligence which flew throughout the kingdom? hath 
this passage :—That his Majesty told the two Houses, “ For 
the Irish army, he hath entered into consultation about it, 
but could not yet well disband it, for divers reasons best 
known to himself. Whereas it is most evident that his 
Majesty put it to the two Houses to remove the difficulties 
about that disbanding, which he tells them he holds fit not 
only to wish it, but to show the way how it may conveniently 
be done, and expects their advice and assistance in it.” 


1 § 25, 2 8 6. 8.817, 


14. 


_ This manner of arguing was displeasing to the nobles, and 
begat much heat? and many bitter replies on both sides. At 
length a principal senator called Otto Cracg stood up, and in 
great anger told the President of the City that the Commons 
neither understood nor considered the privileges of the nobil- — 
ity, who at all times had been exempted from taxes, nor the 
true condition of themselves, who were no other than slaves 
[the word in the Danish is “unfree”]; so that the best way 
was to keep within their own bounds, and acquiesce in such 
measures as ancient practice had warranted, and which they 
were resolved to maintain. This word “slaves” put?+ all the 
burghers and clergy into disorder, causing a loud murmur ? in 
the hall; which Manson, the President of the city of Copen- 
_ hagen, and Speaker of the House of Commons, perceiving, 


and finding a fit occasion of putting in practice a design? before 


concerted (though but weakly) between him and the bishop, 
in great choler rose out of his seat and swore an oath—* That 
the Commons were no slaves, nor would from thenceforth be 
called so by the nobility, which they should soon prove to 
their cost;” and thereupon breaking up the assembly in 
disorder, and departing out of the hall, was followed * by all 
the clergy and burghers. —- 


18 14, 2 8 6, 8812, 4 8 18, 


148 ' LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


15. 


Cawnpore was alive? with all the rufiianism of the region. 
All these scoundrels took their turn at the pleasant? and 
comparatively safe? amusement of keeping up the fire on the 
English people behind the mud walls, Whenever a regular 
attack was made the assailants invariably came to grief.* The 
little garrison, thinning * in numbers every day, and almost 
every hour,* held out with splendid obstinacy. The little — 
population of women and children behind the entrenchments 
had no roof to shelter them from the fierce> Indian sun. They _ 
cowered under the scanty shadow of the little walls, often αὖ 
the imminent peril of the unceasing Sepoy bullets. The only 
water for their drinking was to be had from a single well, 
at which the guns‘ of the assailants were unceasingly levelled. 

To go to the well and draw water became the task® of self- 
sacrificing heroes, who might with better chances of safety 
have led a forlorn hope.’ The water which the fainting 
women and children drank might have seemed® to be red- 
dened by blood, for only at the price of blood was it ever 
obtained. It may seem a trivial detail, but there was ποῦ ~ 
one spongeful’ of water to be had for the purposes of personal 
cleanliness. The inmates of that ghastly garrison were dying 
like flies.’ One does not know which to call the greater: 
the suffering of the women or the bravery of the men. Ἶ 


189, 3287, 8816, 4895, 587, 68 14) = eqs 


16. 


A strange experience occurred in the autumn of the year 
1879.1 <A brother of mine had been from home for three or 
four days, when, one afternoon, at half-past five! (as nearly as __ 
possible), I was astonished to hear my name called out very 
distinctly. 1 80 clearly recognised my brother’s voice that I 
looked all over the house for him, but not finding him, and 
indeed knowing that he must be distant some forty miles, I 

ended by attributing the incident to a fancied delusion,? and _ 


EXERCISES. 149 


_ thought no more about the matter. On my brother's arrival 
_ home, however, on the sixth day, he remarked, amongst 
Ε other things, that he had narrowly escaped an ugly? accident, 
Τὺ appeared that whilst getting out from a railway-carriage! 
he missed his footing, and fell ‘along the platform; by puting 
out his hands quickly, he broke the fall* and only suffered 
a severe shaking. “Curiously enough,” he said, “when I 
_ found myself falling I called out your name.” This did not 
_ strike me for a moment, but on asking him during what 
hour of the day this happened, he gave me the time, which I 
3 4 _ found corresponded exactly with the moment I heard myself 


called. 
— 2$ 25. 2§ 17. $8 7. 486, 


ΤᾺ 17. 


In the meantime an accident favoured! the designs of the 

~ Papal Court. An open quarrel with Spain resulted? from an 
¢ insignificant circumstance. The Spanish ambassador at 
Rome was in the habit of leaving the city very often, at δῃ ". 
early hour in the morning, upon shooting excursions, and had 
long enjoyed the privilege of ordering? the gates to be opened 
for him at his pleasure. By accident or design he was 
- refused permission, upon one occasion, to pass through the 


γι 


gates as usual. Unwilling to lose his day’s sport, and 


enraged at what he considered‘ an indignity, his excellency, 
by the aid of his attendants, attacked and beat the guard, 
mastered them, made his way out of the city, and pursued 
his morning’s amusement. The Pope was furious, and 
_ Caraffe artfully inflamed his anger. The envoy® was refused 
an audience, which he desired for the sake of offering 
_ explanations, and the train’ being thus laid, it was thought 
- that the right moment had arrived for applying the fire- 
_ brand.’ The Cardinal went to Paris post-haste. He told the 
King that the Pope placed implicit reliance on his secret — 
treaty with his Majesty, and that, considering the danger that 
_ threatened from Spain, the moment had come for claiming 
the benefit of the French King’s protection.° 


πες" 
Py 


Mernis «69959. 5817, 4820, *§3 5888. - 181]. 


ἫΝ 


= é 
a 5 
“ἥνε. 


150 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


18. 


Something of these doings was known! to Cecil, and more 
was suspected. It was time that they should end,? and 
accident provided? the means of ending them. It happened 
one day that de Quadra had occasion to send his confidential* 
secretary on some matter of business to Cecil. Borghese— 
so the secretary was called—was the person who ciphered ὃ 
de Quadra’s letters, and held the keys ὃ of his correspondence, 
He went over to the English Government and offered to 


betray all that he knew. Finding his position desperate, 


de Quadra looked his misfortune in the face. He went to 


Elizabeth, told her (with so worldly wise a person it was 


unnecessary to mince matters °) that he had spared the life of 
the man to prevent disturbance, and requested her to send 
him out of the realm. Elizabeth, who as yet was imperfectly 
informed about Borghese’s revelations, said that she had 
every desire to gratify the bishop, but that she could not 
send a man away merely for revealing secrets of state to her 
own ministers. Two days after she sent him word that his 
servant was arrested, and that if he had any complaint to bring 
she was ready to hear it. He replied that he had not asked 
for the man’s arrest, but for his expulsion. He discovered 


that his secretary was at large in the palace, and that Cecil 


was busy daily taking down his information. He demanded’ 
an audience again, and it was refused. 


113. 3816. %§2 ‘487, 995, | S¢0) 


19. 


The bishop of Carthage was sensible that he should be 
singled out for one of the first victims,’ and the frailty 
of nature tempted him? to withdraw himself, by secret flight, 

from the danger and honour of martyrdom; but, soon 
recovering that fortitude which his character required,® he 
returned to his gardens, and patiently expected the ministers 
of death. ‘Two officers of rank, who were intrusted with 
that commission, placed Cyprian between them in a chariot, 


and, as the Proconsul was not then at leisure, they conducted 


aT!” of ee ee ee ee ee en ὙΡΣ ΨΥ ΗΝ 
. 7 ᾿ 4] κ 
s 2 ‘ 


EXERCISES. 151 


him, not to a prison, but to a private house in Carthage, 
which belonged to one of them. An elegant supper was 
provided for the entertainment of the bishop, and his 
Christian friends were permitted for the last time to enjoy 
his society, whilst the streets were filled with a multitude of 
the faithful,* anxious and alarmed at the approaching fate of 
their spiritual father.° In the morning he appeared® before 
the tribunal of the Proconsul, who, after informing himself of 


_ the name and situation of Cyprian, commanded him to offer 
‘sacrifice, and pressed him to reflect on the consequences’ of 


his disobedience. The refusal of Cyprian was firm and 
decisive. 


sO; 2 88 5, 14. S475 4 § 25. °§ 8. 6 8. 13. 7§ 4, 


20. 


His life of early solitude engendered + those peculiar habits 
which occasionally clouded the lustre? of his shining abilities, _ 
and among other strange customs he acquired so unconquer- 
able a habit of thinking aloud? that his intimate friends used 


. to say, in allusion to his two titles, that ‘Dudley was speak- 


ing to Ward.’ The ludicrous effect produced by these public 
meditations * during his Majesty’s cabinet councils became a 


principal cause of his retirement from office. On one 


occasion, when a gentleman obligingly took him home in 
his carriage, to avoid a shower of rain, he conversed 
diligently with himself during their progress, saying, ‘I 
suppose he will expect me to ask him to dinner! I’m afraid 
it must be done.’ His companion being fond of ἃ jest, 
instantly commenced an accompaniment, muttering to him- 
self quite audibly—‘ If he asks me to dinner, 1 shall certainly 
not go!’ Upon hearing this, Lord Dudley laughed heartily, 
made an apology, and insisted on the invitation being both 
given and accepted,® which accordingly it was. 


+8 9, 7§ 9. ὃ 8. 18, 4§ 5. ὅ 816, 68 8, 


ν᾿ \ Ἢ cael Gi Aa ΜΑΙ. Ἁ. =f ἧς 
152 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. ee 
saan - - 
21, Ki 


It required no small audacity! on the part of the Queen, 
when her harbours were the scene of outrages so unparalleled,” _ 
to send a minister to Madrid to settle her differences with 
the Spanish king. She calculated however on the notoriously? 
extreme reluctance of Philip to enter on a quarrel with her. — 
The unlicensed violences* of her subjects, if he was without 
the courage to resent them, might increase his anxiety for a 
better understanding? with her; and she probably expected 
that Philip would submit to any conditions which she might _ 
be pleased to dictate. She was herself uneasy at the possible — 
consequences® of her own behaviour to France. She trusted, 
perhaps,® to Philip’s alarm at the report of her intended mar- — 
riage, and she may have hoped that he would meet her over- _ 
tures with an open hand.’ She accordingly resolved to brazen® _ 
it out, and sent an ambassador to Spain, just as if she was — 
completely innocent of any responsibility? for the piratical. 
attacks of the English ships on the Spanish merchant vessels 
in the Channel. The King was naturally 19. in the greatest a 
perplexity ; but remembering his ‘father’s views about the 
importance of the English alliance, he shut his eyes?! and 
accepted the ambassador as if nothing had happened. 

1813, 3819, 5387. 482 5§3 6890ς. 7§9, 86 IGuuum 

8.17: $20 (7.). oe - 


The strictness of the watch over Mary Stuart was no sooner — 
relaxed than her jailer, who, though himself an Englishman, 
was strongly inclined toward the Catholic Queen, and would — 
have strained a point’ to do her any honourable service, found ~ 
her again busy at the old bad work.” She was detected once | 
more trying to bribe his servants, and to smuggle letters οὐδ 
of the prison to her friends abroad. The net had again to 
be drawn tighter.2 Her people were briefly told,* in the preg- | = 
nant style of those times,° that if there was more of such work 
they would be sent straight to London to be hanged. Mary, — 
thus baffled in her plottings, fell back upon her stormy man- — 
- ners and impotent® threats ; and her jailer wrote that she had ° 


τ 


ἐν 


EXERCISES. .- 153 


never been so unquiet since he had had the charge of her. 
One good consequence at any rate followed. He understood: 
her character at last: she had exhausted the respect which 
he had long continued to entertain for her.’ Mary was 
driven in upon herself. Deprived of all other weapons, she 
could only have recourse to her powers of sarcasm, where 
she was unmatched. If she could no longer hoodwink® - 
Elizabeth, she hoped at any rate she might sting her by a 
bitter and elaborate despatch. 

— 1§3. 2§4. 989,21, 4§13, °$24 687, 782]. 5816, 


: 23. 


The Saxons came over in swarms, and began to increase 
_ 80 much that they became terrible to the very natives who 
had invited them. Then, on a sudden, they entered into a 
7 league with the Picts, whom they had been summoned to 
subdue, and whom they had hitherto repelled with the force 
‘of their arms; and they began to turn their strength against 
their confederates. At first they obliged them to furnish a 
greater quantity of provisions; and seeking an occasion to 
quarrel, protested that unless a more plentiful supply were 
brought, they would break the confederacy, and ravage all 
the island, nor were they backward in putting their threats 
_ into execution. In short, the fire kindled by the hands of 
_ these pagans seemed God’s just revenge’ for the crimes of 
___ these wicked people; for the barbarous conquerors, plundering 
all the neighbouring cities and country, spread the conflagra- 
tion,” without any opposition, from the eastern to the western 
sea; and they covered almost every part of the devoted? 
island with their destroying hordes. Public as well as pri- 
vate structures were overturned ; the priests were slain by the 
altars: insomuch that at the end there were hardly left enough 
_ living to bury the multitude of those that had been slain. 


1 §§ 2, 13. 2§ 9: ὃ 8. 7. 


24. 


Thirty thousand men were left on this decisive field. 
᾿ς Cnaeus escaped from the scene of this disaster and gained the 

coast with a few adherents. He had taken refuge on board 
. L 


. 


154 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


a vessel, and was in the act of putting to sea, when, having - 
accidentally entangled his foot in a rope, an over-zealous 
attendant, in attempting to extricate him, wounded his ankle 
with a blow of a hatchet. He was now compelled to land 
again for the sake of obtaining surgical assistance.’ His 
retreat was discovered by his pursuers, and he was forced to 
quit it and betake himself to the forest. Wearied and des- 
perate, he threw himself at the foot of a tree, where he was 
speedily overtaken, and after a miserable struggle, was at 
last overpowered and killed. 
et Vin 


25. 


The ninth legion, one of the most distinguished in the 
Gallic wars, was thoroughly demoralised. Caesar flew* to 
the spot, and his presence? doubtless restored the greater 
number to a sense of their duty. He felt that he was sup- 


ported, and the bolder the front that he assumed,’ the more ~ 


he was assured would that support be confirmed. He addressed 
the multitude in one of those stirring harangues with which, 
like most great commanders, he could sway their affections 
when he pleased. At first, assuming * the boundless generosity 
of perfect confidence, he declared that he would release from 
his oath whosoever wished to retire. But when the dis- 


affected shouted their approbation of this indulgence,” he — 


suddenly changed the language of his address from Romani, 
or soldiers, to Quirites or citizens, and, shocked and abashed, 
the multitude shrank before him. The whole current of their 
fury was arrested and changed by one magic word. They 
were now as eager in signifying their repentance as before 
in testifying their dissatisfaction. 

1 6, 292. ὃ 5 16. 4§ 20, 5 8 δ, 


26. 
The crafty Numidian employed a stratagem to wile the 
enemy from his entrenchments. The appearance of a slender 
detachment in the plains beneath, and the rumour industri- 


ously spread that Juba had intrusted the relief of Utica to 


EXERCISES. 155 


his Vizier,’ and withdrawn from a personal share in the cam- 
paign, sufficed to impose on the rash and high-spirited 3 
Roman. But Juba, meanwhile, was lurking at a distance of 
only six miles, to support the advanced posts, upon which 
Curio launched himself in full confidence of an easy victory. 
The Vizier adopted the common feint of retiring before the 
enemy's impetuous charge, till their ranks were broken and 
their strength nearly exhausted. When at last he turned and 
faced them, it was not with the paltry squadrons whose 
numbers they had despised, but with the whole strength of 
the Numidian Monarchy—its clouds of native cavalry, its 
troops of elephants, its auxiliary infantry from Spain and 
Gaul—for the barbarian chieftain was no less afraid for his 
own subjects than of an enemy, and would only intrust 
his person to a guard of European mercenaries. The 
Romans were speedily overpowered by the multitudes which 
now surrounded them on every side. 
1 § 25, 2 8 8, 


ATE 


On the receipt of this message the fugitives descended 
from their position, and approaching in the attitude! of sup- 
pliants, demanded grace of their conqueror. Caesar hastened 
to reassure them by expatiating on the lenity which had 
marked his conduct 5 throughout his career ; nor did he falsify 
on this occasion the character which he was so proud to 
claim. The battle of Pharsalia, it was allowed even by 
his enemies,* was honourably distinguished in the annals 
of civil warfare. From the close of the day no more blood 
was shed, the fugitives were spared, and those who begged 
for mercy were not repulsed. It should however perhaps 
be added, that Caesar’s clemency was not prompted solely by 
policy. Even at the moment which satiated his own thirst 
for power and glory, he mourned over the destruction of so 
‘many brave men. ‘They would have it so, he exclaimed, 
as he traversed the field strewn with the corpses -of the 
honoured dead. ‘They would have it so, for after all my 
exploits I should have been condemned to death, had I not 
thrown myself upon the protection of my soldiers.’ 

1g 20, 2817, 8 88 12 15, 


156 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


28. 


The Commissioner was sent out to the Ionian Islands, and 
arrived there in the close of the summer. He called together 
the Senate, and endeavoured to satisfy them as to the real 
nature of his mission, He explained that he had not come 
there to discuss the propriety of maintaining the English 
Protectorate,’ but only to inquire into the best way of secur- 
ing the just claims of the islands” by means of that Pro- 
tectorate. The visit of the Commissioner was not, however, 
a very favourable enterprise for those who were anxious that 
the Protectorate should be continued, and that the islanders 
should be brought to acquiesce in it as inevitable. The 
population persisted in regarding him as a lover of the Greeks, 
and wherever he went he was received with the honours due 


to a liberator. In vain he repeated his assurances that he — 


was come, not to deliver them from the Protectorate, but to 
reconcile them to it. The National Assembly passed a formal 
resolution declaring for union with Greece. Public speakers 
at home wondered and raged over the impertinence of the 
Greek population, who preferred union with Greece to depen- 
dence on England. But sensible men saw that if the case 
was so, the dependence could not long be maintained. 
1 § 25, 2981, 3. 


29. 


These political philosophers institute a comparison, They? 


find the Briton better off than the Pole, and they immedi- 
ately come to the conclusion that the Briton is so well off 
because his bread is dear, and the Pole is so ill off because his 


bread is cheap. Why, is there a single good which in this — 


way I could not prove to be an evil, or a single evil which I 
could not prove to be a good? Take lameness.’ I will prove 
that it is the best thing. in the world to be lame, for I can 
show you men who are lame and yet are much happier than 


men who have the use of their legs.? I will prove health to — 


be a calamity, for I can easily find you people in excellent 
health whose fortunes have been wrecked,? whose characters 
have been blasted,? and who are much more wretched than 


: 4 


- ν Ἂ 
wits: 


gts 


+ ga 


EXERCISES. 157 


ΟΠ many invalids. But is that the way in which any man of 
common sense reasons? No; the question is: Would not 
_ the lame man be happier if you restored him the use of his 
_ limbs? would not the healthy man be more wretched if he 
had gout and rheumatism in addition to all his other ills ? 
_ would not the Englishman be better. off if food were as cheap 
here as in Poland? would not the Pole be more miserable 
if food were as dear in Poland as here ? 


1 8 91, 3 8 δ, 8 88 6, 16, 


30. 
Sir, your throne cannot stand secure upon the prin- 
ciples of unconditional submission and passive obedience,’ 
on powers exercised without the concurrence of the people 


_ to be governed, on acts made in defiance of their prejudices 
and habits, on acquiescence produced by foreign mercen- 
aries, and secured by standing armies.” These may possibly 
be the foundation! of other thrones ; they must be the sub- 


version of ours. It was not to passive principles in our 


ancestors that we owe the honour of appearing before ἃ 


sovereign who cannot feel that he is a prince without know- 


Ε. ing that we ought to be ἴτϑϑ ὃ The revolution is a departure ! 
_ from the ancient course of the descent of this monarchy; the 
people at that time re-entered into their rights; and it was 


not because a positive law authorised what was then done, 


but because the freedom and safety of the subject *—the 
᾿ς origin and cause of all laws—required a proceeding para- 
mount and superior to them. At that ever-memorable 

and instructive period the letter of the law ὃ was superseded 


in favour of the substance of liberty. 


~ 1§§1,2 2819. 3 886, 11. 4881, 2, 8allthrough. 58 10. 


51. 


Do you mean to say that a bad institution ought to be 


τ maintained 1 because some people who have been many years — 
in their graves” said that they did not complain of it? What 
pee af the men of this generation hold a different language ? on this 
_ subject from the men of the last generation? Is this incon- 


1 ὃ 33, * 88 6, 16, 


158 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


sistency, which seems to shock the noble Lord, anything but 


“ὦ 
‘ 


the natural and inevitable progress of all reform®? People 


who are oppressed, but who have no hope of obtaining entire 
justice, beg to be relieved from the most galling part of what 
they suffer. They assure the oppressor that if he will only 
relax a little of his severity they will be quite content ; and 
perhaps at the time they believe they will be content. 
But are expressions of this sort, are mere supplications 
uttered under distress, to stop every person who utters them 
and all his posterity to the end of time from asking for 
entire justice? Am I debarred from trying to recover pro- 
perty of which I have been robbed, because, when the 
robber’s pistol* was at my breast, I begged him to take every- 
thing that I have and spare my life ? 


PSS Ly oid. 4 88 6, 16. 


32. 


In conclusion, I wish to invite, as I have done on previous 
occasions, I wish to invite alternative! suggestions. I have 


asked for them before, and I ask for them again. I say to ~ 


my opponents: If you do not like my remedies—if, on the one 
hand, you think them inadequate; if, on the other hand, you 
think them extravagant, let us know how you will deal with 


the problem now before you. How do you propose to help 


the poor? How do you propose to deal with the competition ? 
which now ‘reduces wages to the barest pittance?? How do 
you propose to stop the flow? of emigration which goes on 
from the country into the towns? How do you propose to in- 


crease the protection of the soil? If you have a better way, — 


we shall joyfully hear of it; but, for my part, neither sneers 


nor abuse, nor opposition shall induce me to accept as the 


will of the Almighty, and the unalterable dispensation of His — 


providence,‘ a state of things under which millions lead sordid, 
hopeless, and monotonous lives, without pleasure in the pre- 
sent, and without hope for the future. The issue is for you; 


and, for my part, I believe that what the wise and learned 


have failed to accomplish, the poor and lowly will achieve 
for themselves. 
ae 281, 8 8 16, 489, 


EXERCISES. 159 


33. 


No circumstances of fortune, you may be sure, will ever in- 
duce us to form or tolerate any such design. If the disposi- 
tion of Providence, which we deprecate, should even prostrate 
you at our feet, broken in power and spirit, it would be our 
duty and inclination to revive, by every practical means, that 
free energy of mind which a fortune unsuitable to your 
virtue had damped and destroyed, and to put you voluntarily 
in possession of those very privileges which you had in vain 
attempted to assert by arms ; for we solemnly declare that 
although we should look on a separation from you as a heavy 
calamity, and the heavier because we know you must have 
your full share in it, yet we had much rather see you totally 
independent of this crown and kingdom than joined to it by 
so unnatural a conjunction as that of freedom with servitude, 
—a conjunction which, if it were at all practicable, could not 
fail in the end to be more mischievous to the peace, 
prosperity, greatness, and power of this nation, than beneficial 


_ by an enlargement of the bounds of nominal empire. But 


because, brethren, these professions are general, and such as 
even enemies may make when they reserve to themselves the. 
construction of what servitude and what liberty are, we in- 
form you that we adopt your own standard of the blessing 
of free government. 
See §§ 1-6 all through the piece. 


34. 


Ts it not, then, absurd to say that because I wished last 
year to quiet the English people by giving them that which 
was beneficial to them, therefore I am bound in consistency + 
to quiet the Irish people this year by giving them that which 


- will be fatal to them? I utterly deny that, in consenting to 


arm the Government 2 with extraordinary powers for the pur- 
pose of repressing disturbances in Ireland, I am guilty of the 


smallest inconsistency. On what occasion did I ever refuse 


to support any Government in suppressing disturbances? It 
is perfectly true that in the debates on the Reform Bill? I 
imputed the tumults and outrages of that year to misrule ; 


181, 280. 3§ 3. 


160 LECTURES.ON GREEK PROSE. 


but did I ever say that those tumults and outrages ought to 
be tolerated? I did attribute the riots, the burning of corn- 
stacks, the destruction of property, to the obstinacy with 
which the Ministers of the Crown had refused to listen to 
the demands of the people; but did I ever say that the 
rioters ought not to be imprisoned, or that the incendiaries 
ought not to be hanged? I did ascribe the disorders in the 
various towns to the unwise rejection of the Bill by the 
Lords *; but did I ever say that such excesses as were com- 
mitted 1 in those towns ought not to be put down, if necessary, 
by the sword ἐν 
4. 8 25. °§ 6. 


35. 


This was the advice which a wise and honest Minister 
would have given to Charles. These were the principles 
on which that unhappy prince should have acted. But no.* 
He would govern, I do not say ill, I do not say tyrannically ; 
I say only this: he would govern the men of his time as if 
they had been the men of a hundred years before ; and there- 
fore it was that all his talents and all his virtues did not save 
him from unpopularity, from civil war, from a prison, from 
a bar, from a scaffold.2 These things are written for our 
instruction. Our lot has been cast in a time analogous in 
many respects to the time which immediately preceded the 
meeting of the Long Parliament.? There is a change in 
society. There must be a corresponding change in the 
Government. We are not, we cannot, in the nature of things, 


be what our fathers were. We are no more like the men οὗ 


- the time of the American War than the men who cried ‘ Privi- 


lege’ round the carriage of Charles were like the men who 
changed their religion once a year at the bidding of aed | 


the Bighth! 
1 8. 18, 2883 6, 10. 8 8 25, 4 ἐξ 8, 16. 


36. 


Yes, you say, but all that display of force was got together 
on behalf of the proposal of Caecilius. And there the orator 


went off into a bitter attack on Caecilius, one of the most — 


EXERCISES. 161 


distinguished and least arrogant of men. For my part, 
Judges, I will confine myself to one remark about his character 
and principle: that he acted in such a way in the matter of 
this proposal that it was his intention to do the best he could? 
for his brother, without in any way being brought into con- 
flict with the State. His object was to mitigate-the punish- 
ment of his brother, not in any way to reopen a question 
already decided by the courts. There is nothing so important 
to the stability of the State as that the matters already * 
decided by the courts should not be further debated. I do 
not think that such allowance should be made for a brother’s 
affection ® that he should be permitted, in consulting the in- ~ 
terests of his family, to forget those of the public. But this 
man was doing nothing of this kind. His proposal had 


nothing to do with the courts; he was simply trying to miti- 


gate the penalty which had been settled by the laws of a 
previous year. When a man complains of a penalty, he is 
not attacking the decisions of a law-court ; he is legitimately 
trying to improve the law. 

el 7: 2 § 28. 3§ 5. 


37. 


These doctrines were eagerly adopted by Marcus Cato, a 
man of unusual gifts, and familiar with the most learned 
authorities. He adopted them, not as most men do, for the. 
purposes of discussion, but in order to live by them. In all 
emergencies or difficulties his conduct is determined by some 
Stoicmaxim. The Equites demand some favour from him : 
‘Do not act to gratify individuals.’ Suppliants arrive, miser-— 
able afflicted men: ‘ You area wicked man if you allow your- 
self to be influenced by pity. A friend confesses a fault — 
against you, and humbly demands forgiveness: ‘ It is an infam- 
ous crime to pardon any one.’ He may urge that his offence 
was a trivial one: ‘All sins are equal.’ You deliver an 
opinion: ‘A wise man’s opinion is fixed and established.’ 
But you have been led, not by the facts, but by supposition : 
‘The wise man never supposes. My own philosophical 
teachers—for I will confess that in my youth, when I was 


τ diffident of my own opinion, I sought the aid of thinkers— ὦ 


ἜΑ, ea” 


162 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


my own teachers were men of a more moderate and humane 
temper; and if you, Cato, with your endowments, had by 
some chance had recourse when you were young to these ~ 
teachers, instead of those you actually consulted and adopted, 
you might have become, I do not say a wiser man, I do not 
say a juster nor a stronger man—that is impossible ; but, 
perhaps, a gentler. | 


The dramatic brevity and vividness must be retained. 


38. : 


Suppose I had been speaking, not before our own citizens, 
_ not before our allies, not even before men—but before beasts ; 
nay, let me go a step further, and say, not before beasts, but 
in a desert and barren place, before the very rocks and 
stones ; if I had there uttered aloud this miserable story, I 
tell you the very mute and inanimate things would have 
stirred and melted! with the recital of such horrors. But 
now that I am speaking before the highest judicial authority ὃ 
of my country, I ought not to fear that you will fail to take 
the same view of the case as I do myself: that the scoundrel 
in the dock is the one man who deserves all these unheard-of 
punishments, as sure as they were undeserved by the wretches 
whom he forced to undergo them. A little while ago, 
Judges, when we were listening to the story of how he 
devised that cruel and lingering death for those innocent and 
miserable seamen, we could none of us restrain our tears ; 
and we were right to weep at the undeserved fate of our 
fellow-creatures and fellow-soldiers; but what will now be 
our feelings when we hear that a man of our own city and of 
our own blood has suffered this scandalous outrage? at the 
hands of this common enemy of mankind without the shadow 
of a palliation *? 
1.8 6. “Ὁ ΟΣ ΡΝ eb 


39. 


I saw that the Senate, without which the State cannot be 
safe, was practically removed from the State altogether ; that 
the consuls, whose duty it was to be the leaders of the public 
deliberations, had taken steps to prevent any public delibera- τ 


EXERCISES. 163 


tions from being possible; that those who had the greatest 
power resisted all proposals for my benefit, and were always 
delivering harangues without truth, but not without effect,? 
in order to ruin me; that there was no one to utter a word 
for me and for the State ; that an idea prevailed?—unfounded, 
indeed, but still it prevailed—that the army was on the 
point of being brought to bear against? your lives and pro- 
perty. When I saw all this, what was I to do, Judges? 
Ought a private man like myself to have fought with arms 
against a tribune of the people? Suppose for a moment that 
that right had prevailed: that a man unaccustomed to fight- 
ing had overcome a trained soldier; still the result would 
have been that the only man who could have saved the State 
from its worst foe would have been put to death. After a 
successful engagement with the tribune, I should have had to 
enter on a new contest with his friends and avengers. 


a1 58}. 3§ 5. 


40. 


I must needs own that it was by the assistance of this secret, 
that I, though otherwise unapt, have adventured upon so 


daring an attempt, never achieved or undertaken before, but 


by a certain author called Homer, in whom, though other- 
Wise a person not without abilities, and (for an ancient) of a 
tolerable genius, I have discovered many gross errors, which 
are not to be forgiven his very ashes,’ if by chance any of 


them are left. For whereas we are assured he designed his 


work for a complete body of all knowledge, human, divine, 
political, and mechanic, it is manifest he has wholly neglected 
some, and been very imperfect in the rest. For, first of all, 
for so eminent a cabalist,? as his disciples would fain represent 
him to be, his account of the opus magnum? is very poor and 


‘deficient ; he seems to have read very superficially either 


Sendivocus or Behmen.? But I have still behind a fault far 
more notorious to tax the author with: I mean his gross 
ignorance in the common laws of this realm, and in the doc- 
trine as well as the discipline of the Church of England.” 


1.8 16, 3 8 25, 


aS ae ἢ 
* “,¢** 


164 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


41. 


At first, perhaps, there were some men who, from weakness ~ 


or from accident, felt the dependence! on their parents, or 
received the benefit from them longer than others, and in 
such was formed a more deep and strong tie of attachment.? 
And while their neighbours, so soon as they were of adult 
vigour, heedlessly left the side of their parents, and troubled 
themselves no more about them, and let them perish,° if so it 
might happen, these few remained with their parents, and 
grew used to them more and more, and finally even fed and 
tended them when they grew helpless. Presently they began 
to be shocked at their neighbours’ callous neglect * of those 
who had begotten and borne them, and they expostulated 


with their neighbours, and entreated and pleaded that their 


own way was the best. Some suffered,! perhaps, for their in- 
terference ; some had to fight for their parents, to prevent 
their neighbours maltreating them; and all the more fixed 
in their new filial feelings did these primitive gropers after 
morality ° become. 

1 3. 281, 38 2], 4 8 15, 58 6, 


42. 4 

There is another circumstance in which my countrymen 
have dealt very perversely with me, and that is, in searching 
not only into my life, but also into the lives of my ancestors. 


If there has been a blot? in my family for these ten genera- 
tions, it hath been discovered by some or other of my corre- ὁ 
spondents. In short, I find that the ancient family to which 


I belong? has suffered very much through the malice and 
prejudice of my enemies. Some of them twit me in the teeth® 
with the conduct of my aunt; nay, there are some who have 
been so disingenuous as to throw into my dish ὁ the marriage 
of one of my forefathers with a milkmaid,* although I myself 


was the first who discovered that alliance. I reap, however, © 


many benefits from the malice of these enemies, as they let 
me see my own faults, and give me a view of myself in the 


worst light, as they hinder me from being blown up by flat-. 


tery and self-conceit, as they make me keep a watchful eye 
over my own actions; and, at the same time, make me 


ay at 
me 


— es ve 


a 


Tet, 6 a 
” $e ‘ ἢ 


EXERCISES. 165 


cautious how I talk of others, and particularly of my friends 
and relations, or value myself upon the antiquity of my 
family. 


1§ 9, 2§ 13. i 3§ 16. 4 8 25. 


43. 


But, to carry this affair more home!: What is it that gives” 
a man authority to commend, or makes it afavour to me that 
he does commend me? It is certain that there is no praise 
valuable but from the praiseworthy. Were the good and evil 
of fame laid upon a level® among mankind, the judge on the 
bench and the criminal at the bar would differ only in their 
stations ; and if one’s word is to pass‘ as much as the other’s, 
their reputation would be much alike to the jury. Pliny, 
speaking of the death of Martial, expresses himself with great 
gratitude to him for the honours done to him in the writings 
of that author ; but he begins it with an account of his char- 
acter, which alone made the applause valuable. There is 
something so peculiar in true glory, that the selfsame action 
done by different men cannot merit the same degree of ap- 
plause. The Roman who was surprised in the enemy’s camp 
before he had accomplished his design, and thrust his bare arm 
into a funeral pile, telling the general that there were many 
who had conspired his death regardless of danger,’ wrought 
in the very enemy an admiration of his fortitude. But the 
slave who represented him in the theatre, and consumed his 


ΠΟ arm in the same manner, did not raise in the spectators a 


great idea of his virtue. . 
18 6. 2 § 13. 9.810. 4§ 3. ὅ 8.18, 


44͵ 


One common calamity makes men! extremely affect each 
other, though they differ in every particular otherwise. The 
passion of love is the most general concern among men, and 
I am glad to hear, by the latest advices? from Athens, that 


there are among that polite people certain persons who have 


erected themselves into a society in honour of the tender 


_ passion.? These gentlemen are not so lost to common sense 


1s 2,'12. e280] ἢν 3§ 8, 


166 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE, 


that they cannot understand the folly they are guilty of, and 
for that reason they separate themselves from all other com- 
pany, that they may enjoy the pleasure of talking incoherently 
without being ridiculous to any but each other. When a 
man comes into the company he is not obliged to make any 
other introduction to his discourse, but at once seating him- 
self in a chair, as he is, he speaks in the thread * of his own 
discourse: ‘ She gave me a very obliging glance; she never 
looked so well as this evening,’ or the like reflection, without 
regard to any other member of the society, for in this 
assembly they do not meet to talk to each other; but every 
man claims the full liberty of talking as he will to himself. 
4§ 16. 


45. 


At length when these two counsellors, Avarice and Luxury, 
had wearied themselves with waging war upon each other, 
they agreed upon an interview, at which none of their coun- 
sellors were to be present. It is said that Luxury began the 
parley, and, after having represented the endless state of war 
in which they were engaged, told his enemy, with a frank- 
ness of heart which 1s natural to him,! that he believed they 


two should be very good friends were it not for the instiga- ὦ 


tions of Poverty, for that pernicious ? counsellor made an ill 
use of his ear, and filled him with groundless apprehensions 
and prejudices. To this Avarice replied that he looked upon 
Plenty, the counsellor of his antagonist, as much more per- 
nicious than his own minister, Poverty, for that he was per- 
petually suggesting pleasures, banishing all the necessary 
cautions 3 against want, and undermining those principles on 
which the government of Avarice was founded. At last, in 
order to an accommodation,‘ they agreed on this preliminary,‘ 
that each should dismiss his counsel. After this was done, 
all other differences were soon accommodated,’ and for the 
future they resolved to live as good friends and confederates, 
and share between them whatever conquests were made on 
either side. For this reason we now find Luxury and 
Avarice taking possession of the same heart, and dividing 
the same person between them. 
1¢ 20, 287, 8.881, 17 495, 5g 2. 


EXERCISES, 167 


46. 


I remember hearing once from a traveller of a very simple 
and strange tribe of men who lived in a remote country 
somewhere in Armenia. They were all poor and hardwork- 
ing, except a few of them, who were fed at the public ex- 
pense, and lived in a temple, and were looked up to as 
prophets. Of these prophets there were several different 
classes. The lowest class were very miserable and ill-fed, and 
their clothes were half worn out; these foresaw what was 
going to happen fifty years a-head, and to these the people 
paid very little heed, and only gave them the worst of every- 
thing. The next class were more happy, and fed on better 
fare, and were allowed richer clothing ; for they only foresaw 


what was likely to occur a year hence. These the people 


respected more than the first ; but, still, they had only a very 
moderate estimate of them. But the highest class of all were 
a very few fat and ordinary men, who were kept in every 
luxury, and before whom every one bowed down with all 
imaginable worship ; for they foresaw what was going to befall 


on the very next day. The fact was that these simple 


savages cared very little for knowing what was destined to 
happen a long time hence, and were only moderately inter- 
ested in knowing the future events of the coming year ; but 
everybody, high and low alike, were eager to know the im- 
mediate future, and gave every honour to those whom they 
thought able to foretell it. 


See sections 17 and 20. 


47. 


I was not gone far before I heard the sound of trumpets 
and alarms, which seemed to proclaim the march of an 
enemy, and, as I afterwards found, was in reality what I 
apprehended it. There appeared at a great distance a very 
shining light, and in the midst of it a person of a most 
beautiful aspect; her name was Truth. On her right hand 
there marched a male deity, who bore several quivers on his 
shoulders, and grasped several arrows in his hand; his 
name was Wit. The approach of these two enemies filled all 


168 LECTURES ON GREEK PROSE. 


the territory of False Wit with unspeakable consternation, in- 
somuch that the goddess of those regions appeared in person — 
on her frontiers, with the several inferior deities and the 
~ different bodies of forces which I had before seen in the 
temple, who were now drawn up in array, and prepared to 
give their foes a warm reception. As the march of the 
enemy was very slow, it gave time to the inhabitants who 
bordered upon the regions of Falsehood to draw their forces 
into a body and attend the issue of the combat. 


48. 


When the iniquity of the times brought! Socrates to his 
execution, how great and wonderful it is to behold him re- 
ceive the poison with an air of warmth and good-humour, 
and, as if going on some agreeable journey, bespeak some 
deity to make it fortunate! When Phokion’s good actions 
had met with the like reward from his country, and he was 
led to death, with many others of his friends, they bewailing 
their fate, he walking composedly to the place of execution, 
how gracefully does he support his illustrious character to the 
very last instant! One of the rabble spitting at him as he 
passed, with his usual authority he called to know if no one 
was ready to teach this fellow how to behave himself. When 
a poor-spirited creature that died at the same time for his 
offences bemoaned himself unmanfully, he rebuked him with 
this question, ‘Is it no consolation to such a man as thou art 
to die with Phokion?’ At the instant when he was to die 
they asked him what were his commands to his son, and he 
answered, ‘ To forget this injury of the Athenians.’ 


1§ 14, 


49. 


_ Those entertainments and pleasures we most value in life 

are such as dupe and play the wag! with the senses. For if 
we make an examination of what is generally understood by 
happiness, as it has respect either to the understanding or to 
the senses, we shall find all its properties and adjuncts will 
herd under this short definition,” that it is a perpetual posses- — 


2 


aay 
i 


a 


τὴς eee 


EXERCISES. 169 


sion of being well deceived. It is manifest what advantages 
fiction has over truth, and the reason is just at our elbow,} 
because imagination can build nobler scenes than fortune or 
nature will be at expense to furnish.2 We should consider 
that the debate lies merely between things past and things 
conceived, and so the question is only this : Whether things 
that have place in the imagination may not as properly be 
said to exist, as those that are seated in the memory ? which 
may be justly held in the affirmative, and very much to the 
advantage of the former,‘ since this is acknowledged to be the 
womb of things,® and the other allowed to be no more than the 
grave. If this were seriously considered by the world, which 
I have a certain reason to suspect it hardly will, men would 
no longer reckon among their high points of wisdom the art 


of exposing weak ideas, and publishing infirmities——an em- 


ployment, in my opinion, neither better nor worse than that 
of unmasking.°® 


1§ 16, 298917. 891, 9. 495. 5.581]; 6 88 3, 18. 


50. 


As Mencius the philosopher was travelling in pursuit of 
wisdom, night overtook him at the foot of a lofty mountain, 
remote from the habitations of men. Here he perceived a 
hermit’s + cell, and approaching, asked for shelter, ‘ Enter,’ 
cried the hermit; ‘men deserve not to be obliged, but it 
would be imitating their ingratitude to treat them as they 
deserve. Enter; examples of vice may sometimes strengthen 
us in the ways of virtue.’ 2 

‘ You have been ill-used by mankind?’ said Mencius. 

* Yes,’ said the hermit ; ‘I have exhausted 5 my whole for- 
tune on them, and this staff and these roots are all that I have © 
in return for it.’ 

‘ Did you give or lend the money ?’ said Mencius. 

‘I gave it undoubtedly, said the hermit, ‘for where 
were the merit of being a money-lender and receiving profit ?’ 

‘Did they ever own that they received it?’ asked the 


-philosopher.# 


1 § 25, 2 88 12 14, ὃ 8. 3, 4 8:8: 
Μ 


eee of gratitude, and solicitations for future 


: them of ingratitude. You looked for nothing but thi 


proceeded to prepare a humble repast. 


iu A ἜΝΙ times,’ senlied hee Hi thoy load 


Then,’ said Mencius, smiling, ‘it is unjust 


this they gave you, as you yourself declare, repeatedly. Fs. 
Plainly you are ἃ philosopher, said the hermi 


δ § 6, 


PRINTED ΒΥ Τ᾿ AND A. CONSTABLE, PRINTERS TO HER MAJEST 
AT THE EDINBURGH UNIVERSITY PRESS. Ὁ 


a © A ee SAR Ἐν ae. ΝΡ Α δύ Aes 


__ BY ARTHUR SIDGWICK, M.A, 


Small 8vo. 15. 6d. each. 
SCENES FROM GREEK PLAYS: 


te Gr oa en LP Lr OL 
. Abridged and adapted for the use of Schools. 


- 


ARISTOPHANES. 
THE CLOUDS. THE FROGS. THE KNIGHTS, PLUTUS. 


EURIPIDES. 
ALCESTIS. BACCHA. THE CYCLOPS. ELECTRA. HECUBA. 
. ION. IPHIGENIA IN TAURIS. MEDEA, 


Small 8vo. 
HOMER’S ILIAD. 
2 " Edited, with Notes for the use of Junior Students. 
Books I. and II., 2s. 62. Book XX1I., τς. 6d. Book XXII., 1s. δώ. 


Small 8vo. 25. 


CICERO DE AMICITIA. 
Edited, with Notes and an Introduction. 


Crown 8vo. 35. 6d. 


Α ΕΙΑΘΤ GREEK. WRITER: 


Crown 8vo. 38. 6d. 


EASY SELECTIONS FROM PLATO. 
δ...» orming a Greek Reading Book for the use of Middle Forms of Schools. 


" Crown 8v0. 55. 
AN INTRODUCTION TO GREEK PROSE 
3 COMPOSITION. 


Crown 8vo. 55. . 
AN INTRODUCTION TO GREEK VERSE 
; COMPOSITION. 
By A. SIDGWICK, M.A., and F. Ὁ. MORICE, M.A. a 


RIVINGTONS : 
WATERLOO PLACE, LONDON 


: —, 
SST Σμ σον σος : 
“τορος nan arte en 
ὩΣ 


a 
staan 
ore 
=< ς 
Ων αν 
we 


oem 
pa 


yates ey 


ot Se α 


eke: 


ne 


